JP7565063B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the above gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Before the multiple decorative symbols are displayed in a winning state, a specific image is displayed, which suggests that a specific game state will occur after a winning game state that is executed after the display of the winning decorative symbols is displayed.
The specific image is an image that is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a variable display in which the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a winning state in which the specific game state occurs, and is an image that disappears after the state changes before the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed,
When the state of the specific image is changing, there is a timing when the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a winning state in which the specific game state does not occur, and after the specific image disappears, the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a winning state in which the specific game state occurs.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining judgment tables T1 to T4. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during non-time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment processing. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 1 pre-judgment processing. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. 13 is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status reset process. 13 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-reading performance determination process. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading performance pattern determination table T51. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement pattern of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the frame movable part 69. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the display presentation of the sub-display screen 64. FIG. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling reaching imminent indication performance A. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling reaching imminent indication performance B. This is a diagram to explain the ceiling reaching imminent indication performance C. A diagram to explain special character appearance effect A. A diagram to explain special character appearance effect B. A diagram to explain special character appearance effect C. A diagram to explain the winning notification effect A. A diagram to explain the winning notification effect B. A diagram to explain the winning notification display C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a sound reach effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining silent reach performance A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining silent reach presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining vibration effect A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining vibration effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining vibration effect C. This is an explanatory diagram of a changing icon change presentation A that covers multiple changes. This is an explanatory diagram of the changing icon change presentation B that covers multiple changes. This is an explanatory diagram of the changing icon change presentation C that covers multiple changes. A diagram to explain the promotion effect A after the patterns are aligned. A diagram to explain the promotion effect B after the patterns are aligned. This is a diagram to explain the promotion effect C after the patterns are aligned. A diagram to explain reserved pattern presentation A. A diagram to explain reserved pattern presentation B. A diagram to explain reserved pattern presentation C. A diagram to explain the pattern change stop performance A. A diagram to explain the pattern change stop performance B. A diagram to explain the pattern change stop performance C.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine Fig. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots gaming balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when a gaming ball wins a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls is paid out to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer hull of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located on the front side of the outer frame and inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the game board 2 can be seen through the opening.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also called a frame movable gadget 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can move left and right in the left and right directions. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured so that the main surface approaches and moves away from the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is normally stationary at a retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other and stop at a position where it touches the handle 60. When in the advanced position, the frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right depending on the performance. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in a pair across the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamps 66 include a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and are arranged above the front frame 53 to provide light effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a normal winning port 27 (normal winning port 27), an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple game nails protruding therein to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the play area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the play area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area (respective reserved display area) in which a reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images that represent a reserved play, and are also called reserved icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digestion image 9C is an image that represents the reserved play, and is also called the reserved image 9C, the reserved icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The reserved icon 9C may also be simply called a reserved icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the result of the big win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop with a repeat number such as "777". If a loss occurs, the display will stop with a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, the variable display of the variable symbols may be a vertical scroll or may be in other forms. The combination of the variable symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display", "variable decorative symbol display", or simply "variable display" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance counts the performance during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops (also called the special pattern change period) as one change performance (one cycle of change performance). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also a jackpot performance performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo performance for waiting for customers, and the like. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or indicate the result of a lottery for a special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols described below, and a second reserved display area that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols described below. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a described below and the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing performance pattern (performance pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and by displaying the reserved consumption image 9C, it can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the reserved first special symbol or reserved second special symbol is consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first movable board 14 (also called the first movable gadget 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable gadget 14 is configured as a vertically long rod-shaped member that can move left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable gadget 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position, it covers a part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured so that a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Fig. 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting hole 20 described below. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always allows the game ball to enter with a constant ease. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number, etc., and the determination of a jackpot, etc.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a second special symbol (a big win lottery). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Fig. 3). The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when it is in a closed state, and may allow a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in a closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal pattern lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal pattern random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining the normal pattern when the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and comparing this obtained random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28. Instead, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on normal pattern display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has passed, the normal pattern corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize winning hole (first special prize winning hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V opening and closing member 71. The first large prize winning hole 30 includes an opening and closing member (first special prize winning hole opening and closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening and closing action. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize winning hole 30 when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning port sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first large prize winning device 31 as areas through which a game ball that has passed through the first large prize winning port 30 can pass. The first large prize winning port sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to distribute the game ball to the V area 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70 in a second state (stopped state). In addition, the V-opening member 71 may be configured to move in a left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, as long as it has a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, without being limited to rotational movement. That is, when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V area 39, and when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advance state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. In other words, the V area 39 is a probability variable operation port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 is not a probability variable operation port. The first large winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is installed at the point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large prize opening start port 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to be equipped with the large prize opening start port 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim for winning at the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting hole 21, the first large winning hole 30, and the second large winning hole 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of a lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) of a predetermined jackpot stopping mode, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first jackpot opening 30 or the second jackpot opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that has been won). The opening patterns of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 30 and second jackpot opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If it is a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable display (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the change display may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 5) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 5) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for both the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when the special pattern based on the special pattern reservation becomes variable displayable. "Consuming a special reserved symbol" means determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the reserved symbol, and executing a variable display of a special symbol to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbol or during the execution of a special game, the right to a jackpot lottery for that winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a and the second reserved special symbol display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting up the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol that has been determined in advance (a normal symbol in a predetermined stopping state, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern that corresponds to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit is displayed as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern, the normal pattern is displayed as a variable pattern for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, both LEDs alternately lit. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed as a stopped pattern (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal pattern random number (winning random number) acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reserve in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reserve stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. The consumption of the normal pattern reserve means determining the normal pattern random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal pattern reserve and executing the variable display of the normal pattern to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal pattern or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal pattern for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved maps is displayed on the reserved map display 44. The reserved map display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved maps by lighting up the LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 3 and 4. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Fig. 3), a sub-control board 90 (Fig. 4), an image control board 100 (Fig. 4), a lamp control board 107 (Fig. 4), a sound control board 106 (Fig. 4), and a payout control board 110 (Fig. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured by at least including the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start port sensor 17a, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27, and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling the display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls the operation of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable roles 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is also attached to the performance button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the performance button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword component detection switch that detects that the sword component 65 has been searched is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special chart reserved memory area 85, and a normal chart reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a pre-determination command, reserved ball number command, fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process described later is set. The special pattern reserved memory area 85 includes a first special pattern reserved memory area 85a in which the first special pattern reserved is stored, and a second special pattern reserved memory area 85b in which the second special pattern reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as random numbers for special patterns corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special symbol reserved. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal symbol reserved. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable parts 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off or on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information do not change state even when the power is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" as the initial state of the flags, and the other flags are set to "OFF". Also, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) includes a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit in the sub-control main process (described later) are stored, and includes pre-judgment commands, reserved ball number commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V pass commands, and customer waiting standby commands. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and includes a fluctuation performance start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, and the like. The pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-judgment information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special reserved effect counter, a second special reserved effect counter, a normal reserved effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, an overnight effect counter, a probability change effect counter, a time-saving effect counter, and the like are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is not cleared even when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF or ON, and is maintained as it is. In other words, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and pre-judgment information are not changed even when the power supply is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning the power supply of the gaming machine 1 OFF or ON, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by the RAM clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal pattern random number (win random number)" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed as stopped, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is used in a lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on the passage through the gate 28. The obtained normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "look-ahead performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "look-ahead performance random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the judgment tables T1 to T4. Figure 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the big win judgment table T1, Figure 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern hit judgment table T3, and Figure 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern change pattern judgment table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." In FIG. 8(A), it is shown that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." In addition, in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." The contents of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". In FIG. 8 (B), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, it is more difficult to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in the time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol hit determination table T3 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss." FIG. 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "miss."

The normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol change time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "1 second".

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the acquired jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50-55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V-scheduled jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56-67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected, if the jackpot type random number value is "0-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot", and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number value is "83-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stopping symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping symbol, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be specified. The specific details of the "16RV scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not scheduled to pass" will be described later.

Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-saving state. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that in the non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss", the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach", the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, when the second starting hole 21 is won in the time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P61". As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach performance in which the fluctuation time after the reach is longer than that of a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed in a developed manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive.

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). In Figure 12 (A), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". Figure 12 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls are won (a maximum of 10 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 13 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", "15H", or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In Figure 13 (B), the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 are shown. In the opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds. In the opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 15th round. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (prescribed number of winnings, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.

14 is a diagram for explaining the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (FIG. 9). In FIG. 14(A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd and 6th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30. In the opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.
The port will be opened.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot winning holes (the first jackpot winning hole 30 and the second jackpot winning hole 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the last round game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing jackpot" and "V-non-passing jackpot". "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V-opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, the jackpot with the special stop pattern data of 11H to 14H and 21H corresponds to "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 15H and 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing scheduled jackpot" includes the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot", the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot". The "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" has a total of 16Rs. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R. In 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R (Figure 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a long time (Figure 14: opening pattern 31), and it is easy to pass through to the V area 39 in the first large prize opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 14R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 15R. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of opening pattern 22, in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in 15R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 13R. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) between the first large prize winning opening 30 and the second large prize winning opening 35 (opening member 32 and opening member 37), and only the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are designed to play a time-saving game (100 times in this example) after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large prize winning opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first large winning port 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", and it becomes difficult to determine whether the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). In addition, after the time-saving game ends, the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state becomes a high-probability low-base state that appears to be the normal state in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning port 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a high probability low base state but a latent state in which a high probability is hidden (latent high probability state), and this latent high probability state is difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", and the low-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the high-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In contrast, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when the game ball enters the second start hole 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when the game ball enters the first start hole 20.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The gaming control microcomputer 81 realizes the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbols. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the time-shortening of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called the "time-shortening state", and the state in which the time-shortening of the special symbol is not controlled is simply called the "non-time-shortening state". In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the special symbol (the time from the start of the display of the special symbol to the derivation of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges the variation pattern using the variation pattern judgment table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortening state in the time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time-shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variation time-shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as the special symbol reservation) at the starting port is more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a big win while playing smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special pattern of the special pattern display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern in the time-shortening state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the hit judgment (judgment of the normal pattern) using the normal pattern hit judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) in which the number of normal pattern random number values (hit random number values) judged as a hit is higher in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state, as the probability fluctuation control for the normal pattern. Therefore, in the time-shortening state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal pattern normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal pattern of the normal pattern display device 42, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 42 will be a winning pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not executed. In the time-saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is 1 second in the time-saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 is opened more frequently and the game balls enter the second start hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. The high base state is a state in which the so-called electric support control (control that supports the entry into the second start hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the following controls, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the game passes through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is particularly called a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high probability high base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV-passing jackpot," the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," and the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. For the "16RV-passing jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," the high probability high base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won after the jackpot game and the jackpot game is executed. In the case of the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing jackpot", the high probability high base state ends when the special pattern is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., low probability state), time-saving state, and high base state if the V area 39 is not passed during the jackpot game (almost never). This game state is particularly called the "low probability high base state" and the "low probability time-saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low probability high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low probability high base state ends when the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after powering on is the normal probability state, the non-time-saving state, and the low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly called the "low probability low base state." The low probability low base state is sometimes called the "normal game state" or the "low probability non-time-saving state (also simply called the non-time-saving state)." In addition, the state during which the special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes called the "special game state (jackpot game state)." Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is sometimes called the "specific game state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right game area 3B (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chute 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (entry into the start hole) to be obtained than by hitting to the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a jackpot game. On the other hand, in a low base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the left game area 3A (Fig. 1) by hitting to the left. Because electric support control is not being executed, the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win in the first starting hole 20 than in the second starting hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the ball is hit from the left in order to get the game ball to win in the first starting hole 20. This allows more start wins to be obtained than if the ball was hit from the right.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be described with reference to Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/lose determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/lose advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is the ceiling flag, i.e., "1", i.e., "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", i.e., "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is the ceiling counter, i.e., "500", and the other counters are "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number) shown in FIG. 7(A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and the reserved ball number process (step S107) in that order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In the other processes, for example, the second special chart reserved display 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 2 described later, and the first special chart reserved display 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the start-hole sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84 according to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (step S207), and then a special chart 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserved memory area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The details of the special chart 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, as in the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reservation storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reservation storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Drawing 2 Pre-Decision Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S301). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is OFF, the pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has been generated by using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since the probability state is high (the probability variable flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has been generated by referring to the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the pre-determination is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, the pre-determination is a "miss". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed by using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. However, in another embodiment, the pre-determination may be performed by using a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", the pre-determination is "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) is in effect here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (FIG. 11) and specifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, the reach pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and fluctuation pattern "P68" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but in other embodiments, the advance determination may be performed using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Drawing 1 Pre-judgment Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the special chart 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special chart 2 pre-judgment process, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the state is normal probability (the probability flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as a "miss". Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The process of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal pattern is changing (step S502). If the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of normal symbols being "0", the number of reserved balls of normal symbols becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S504, and the reserved balls of normal symbols immediately become "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the reserved balls of special symbols become "1" once, and then the reserved balls are consumed in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) described later, and the reserved balls of special symbols become "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win judgment by referring to the normal symbol win judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored as a judgment value in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86. Then, it judges whether or not there is a win by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win judgment table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is judged as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is judged as a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 (FIG. 8 (D)) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the normal symbol fluctuation time as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the game state judgment result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is judged to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is judged to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start displaying the normal symbol fluctuation (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is in a non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 6 balls) or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it has reached the time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 to stop its operation (step S521), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special operation status". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big win determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is executed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" or not (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reservation memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special chart reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and when reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the reserved second special charts are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left out of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b are shifted one to the left (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special chart reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). The above steps consume the first special chart reserved in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the reserved image 9A at the right end of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a are each shifted to the right by one (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one first special chart reserved has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the big win determination processing (step S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information on the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed in priority to the consumption of the first reserved special chart. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second reserved special chart makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass V) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first reserved special chart.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for special chart 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special chart 1 (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol) of the first special symbol reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the probability of a jackpot is high (the probability flag is ON), the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is being used here, it determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the type of jackpot, the special stop pattern data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss," the special stop pattern data (01H) corresponding to the miss pattern is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flow charts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1 (step S1409) are similar in flow of processing, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot is a special symbol 2 or not (step S1603). When the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The jackpot type is judged based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state V-passing jackpots in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for a non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot, the portion of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to a V-passing jackpot (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in special chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" in special chart 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in special chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, as the table for a non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a V non-pass scheduled jackpot (the part "P4" to "P6"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of a reach with miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects the fluctuation pattern (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to reach with miss (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P7" to "P14" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In Special Chart 2, one of the patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected as the pattern from the read-out random number value for the pattern and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Since the pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened pattern function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more patterns with shorter change times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number value is not a reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects a fluctuation pattern (step S1609). Here, as the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to a miss without a reach (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" to "P16" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In the special chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 (1 to 4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so the shortened variation function according to the number of reserved balls is activated.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 is different from that of the already-described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V-passing jackpot (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P41" to "P43" in the special chart 1, and the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P61" to "P63" in the special chart 2) is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) described above. If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes associated with the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game status management process (step S1801). The game status management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time-saving times, and the details of which will be described later. After the game status management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next reserved game is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening member according to the type of the jackpot that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V-shaped opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71. Along with setting the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of big win that was won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) that were executed during the big win game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag, and will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "100" when the state transitions to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variable counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the high probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the high probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "100" when the time-saving state is entered. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not the game is in a special state, the special state counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the number of specified rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of times the special pattern changes when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of rotations. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1 (step S2012). In other words, it judges whether the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached has elapsed. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability bonus counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and the time-saving counter is set to "700" as the number of time-saving times (number of times awarded). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game Status Reset Processing]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the high probability flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the high probability flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the high probability flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the high probability flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process is terminated. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the non-time-saving state is always in a low base state, the low base state is maintained during the execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big win devices (the first big win device 31 and the second big win device 36) based on the opening pattern in the big win game being executed has ended. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening and closing member operation process is performed to operate the V opening and closing member 71 (step S2201). The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large winning opening 30, and in the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the large prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the large prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the large prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the large prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big prize opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big prize opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big prize. After the big prize opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the big prize game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the big prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of game. However, in another embodiment, when the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening during one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the large prize opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the large prize opening in that round of play has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the large prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) after the large prize opening is closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the large prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time has passed since the large prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play, and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" even if the game ball passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the ending time when the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can judge that it is an opening round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won in the first large winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process judges whether the first ball has won (step S2503). If the first ball has not won (step S2503: NO), the process ends. This is because there has been no winning in the first large winning port 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-opening the V opening/closing member 71 is to execute a short opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "short opening" or "long opening". In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning hole 30 passes through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set to be the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V effective period during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Also, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is that, since there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, the period until the game ball that entered the V area 39 side just before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is taken into consideration. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (the passage of the game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned ON based on the V passage due to fraudulent acts and is not set to a high probability state. After the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V valid period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second winning flag is ON or not (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening or not (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V opening/closing member 71 long is to execute the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) when the second ball wins in the case of "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). Note that here, the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning port 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), so generally, the time from the winning of the second ball to the end of the round is shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured such that at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning port 30 pass through the V area 39 because the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, and ends this processing.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is left open and the V valid period is continued, and the process ends.

If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S2540 that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this process.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current big win game becomes "non-high probability state", "time-saving state", and "high base state" (i.e., low probability high base). This low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next big win is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the high probability flag ON (step S2304), sets the high probability counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307), and sets the time-saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time-saving state", and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the ceiling flag ON, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins until b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, when the probability change flag is OFF after a jackpot game, the game will enter b time reduction (play time) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information regarding the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed for several seconds (ball brushing period). If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition to incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is executed repeatedly between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process will be described later in detail. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance process (step S4305). The variable performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable performance process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes a display performance according to the received command using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a sound performance that outputs sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp performance that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-judgment command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, and a pre-reading performance pattern if executed. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is performed during a variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the reserved ball number of the special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of the special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a fluctuation performance start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation performance start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a change stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a change performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "change performance end process" is a process for stopping the change performance executed during the change of the special pattern. In the change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the change stop command, and sets a change performance end command for ending the change performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 that is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. Note that if the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the change performance end process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If an opening command has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a designation pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the designation command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If an ending command has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending performance pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special chart stop pattern data, and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a specific ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability flag, probability counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving performance counter, probability-changing performance counter, and ceiling performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during time-saving is set in the time-saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during probability-changing is set in the probability-changing performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling performance counter. This allows information about the number of time-saving times, the probability-changing times, and the ceiling times to be stored not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-pass information in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command or a RAM clear notification command) and then ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-judgment information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-reading performance pattern information. The pre-reading performance pattern information is information indicating the contents of the pre-reading performance executed during the fluctuation performance, and is selected in step S4604 described later. Figure 39 (A) shows a state in which the jackpot judgment information "miss" and the fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-judgment results corresponding to the first to third reserved special charts 2, respectively, and the pre-judgment results corresponding to the fluctuations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39 (B) shows a state in which the special chart 2 wins from the state of Figure 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. Here, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored as the pre-determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as the pre-reading performance pattern information in each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special chart 2 pieces and the area corresponding to the variation. FIG. 39(C) shows the state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. If pre-reading performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, new pre-reading performance pattern information is not selected and stored. On the other hand, if pre-reading performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "jackpot" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "big win" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-55", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "56-67", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "68-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-107", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "108-114", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "115-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Note that the type, content, and range of the random number value to be selected of the look-ahead performance pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead performance is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead performance pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and the area. As a result, the look-ahead performance pattern A is also executed in the variable performance executed before the variable performance corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable performance corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable performance. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it will be executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead performance will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
41 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special symbol stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, and pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). The core performance pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, the lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up performances and pre-reading performances on this core performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the core performance pattern by referring to the core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the core performance pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, and multiple types of core performance patterns that perform no reach miss performance are set. The type of core performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", a core performance pattern that performs an SP1 performance is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", a core performance pattern that performs a no reach miss performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up performance pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination processing is processing for determining additional performance to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, Figure 43 shows the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", or "61" to "73".

In FIG. 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance-up effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up presentation pattern, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a count presentation pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count presentation pattern determination process is a process for displaying on the display screen 7a the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the special bonus period, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving period, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on, the number of fluctuations since the big win was played, etc. During the special bonus period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period on the display screen 7a based on the value of the special bonus presentation counter. Also, during the time-saving period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period based on the value of the time-saving presentation counter.

The performance control microcomputer 91 can execute various performances based on the value of the ceiling performance counter and the value of the overnight performance counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining variations until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight performance counter records the number of variations since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter every time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). If the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling performance counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. This allows a player who sees the chance image to recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that RAM clearing has not been performed. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH3 (e.g., TH3=50). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also erase the display or chance image indicating the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH4 (e.g., TH4=100). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH5 (e.g., TH5=200) again. The performance control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the overnight performance counter as described above, or may also determine based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH6 (e.g., TH6 = 100), may turn off the display of the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH7 (e.g., TH7 = 70), and may display the value of the ceiling performance counter again when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH8 (e.g., TH8 = 50).

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number value and the stop pattern pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what kind of effect will be performed as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) that corresponds to the variable pattern included in the variable start command. For example, when the variable pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the process during the variable performance (FIG. 36: step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is set to zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variable performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

9. Operation of movable body and display performance of sub display screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 50, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the operation of the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), and the display performance of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable role 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable role 14. The first movable role 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The first movable role 14 is difficult to see at its upper and lower ends, and the vicinity of its central part is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable role 14 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, only a part of the first movable role 14 may be stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the entirety may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable role 14 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to be able to move (advance) from a retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move left and right in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable prop 14 can be set arbitrarily. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable prop 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable prop 14 may be formed with a decorative part, or may be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable role 15. The second movable role 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable role 15 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable role 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stopped at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 can move upward (retract) from the advanced position of Figure 48 to the retreat position shown in Figure 1 and can be stopped there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable role 69. The frame movable role 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right directions. The two members are formed of flexible materials, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach and move away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the frame movable role 69 are normally stationary at retreat positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the frame movable role 69 can move (advance) from the retreat position toward the handle 60, that is, move toward each other, and stop at a position where they touch the handle 60 (second mode). When in the advanced position, the frame movable role 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60. The movable frame part 69 can move in a direction in which the two components move away from each other so that the frame moves from the second position to the first position.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of the performance, effect, modification, and mode of this embodiment Below, each of the performance examples (display performance example, role-moving performance example) of this embodiment will be described. In addition, the effect example, modification, and mode example for the performance example will also be described. The performance described below is a performance realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. Note that the following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Also, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples.

The ceiling reach suggestion effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 51 to 53. These ceiling reach suggestion effects are executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, during the decorative symbol variation effect in the normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the ceiling reach suggestion effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Ceiling Reaching Indication A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A. The ceiling arrival suggestion performance is a performance that displays information (reach schedule information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state) to suggest the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached to the player. When the number of fluctuations reaches 500 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of fluctuations that reaches the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling. In the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), three reserved icons 9A and a variable icon (reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a during the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Here, the number of changes since the power of the gaming machine 1 was turned on is 10, and the value YC of the overnight effect counter is 10 (YC=10). The number of remaining changes until the ceiling is reached is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190 (TC=190). In other words, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off the previous day when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 200, and the next day, after the power is turned on, 10 special chart changes have been made. In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, the first threshold TH1=10, the third threshold TH3=50, and the fourth threshold TH4=100 are set (stored) as the thresholds for the overnight counter. Also, the second threshold TH2=200 is set (stored) as the threshold for the ceiling effect counter. Note that these threshold values are merely examples, and can be set to any numerical value.

As shown in FIG. 51(A), when the value YC of the overnight counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC=TH1=10), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is smaller than the second threshold value TH2 (=200). If TC is smaller than TH2 (TC<TH2), the sub-control board 90 displays the suggestion information SJ on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 51(B). On the other hand, if TC is equal to or greater than TH2 (TC≧TH2), the display screen 7a does not display the suggestion information SJ (see FIG. 52(B) described later). The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining changes until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (=200). When this suggestion information SJ is displayed, the player can know that the gaming machine 1 has not been RAM cleared from the previous day to today, and that the number of remaining changes until the b time reduction (play time) is reached continues from the previous day.

The suggestion information SJ in this embodiment is a star-shaped graphic image, and is displayed on the back side of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C, overlapping with these icons. Note that the display of the suggestion information SJ is not limited to a mode in which an image is newly displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, a mode in which a suggestion image appears, as long as it can suggest to the player that the number of remaining variations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2. For example, the suggestion information SJ may be displayed (suggested) by a part of the display screen 7a changing to a specific color, or may be displayed by emitting light. It may also be displayed by changing the color, shape, position, etc. of an image that has already been displayed. Note that the sub-control board 90 may not display the suggestion information SJ with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) even when YC=TH1 and TC<TH2. For example, the sub-control board 90 may obtain a random number when YC=TH1, and determine whether or not to execute the display performance of the suggestion information SJ according to the random number value.

As shown in FIG. 51(C), after the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the suggestion information SJ moves to the right where the right sub-display screen 64R is located on the display screen 7a. After that, the suggestion information SJ is displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R, and by moving further to the right, the whole of the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 51(D). As the whole of the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the arrival schedule information CD is displayed. Here, the timing when the whole of the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the timing when the arrival schedule information CD is displayed are simultaneous, but these timings may be different. The arrival schedule information CD is information related to the remaining number of changes until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and notifies the player of the number of changes (number of games) until the play time is reached. Here, the arrival schedule information CD is an image including the number "190" representing the number of changes (number of games) until the play time is reached. Note that the expected arrival information CD is not necessarily limited to a numerical value representing the remaining number of variations, so long as it is related to the remaining number of variations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached. For example, the ratio of the remaining number of variations to the initial set number (e.g., 500) set after a jackpot game may be expressed as a percentage, or the ratio may be expressed by a meter. The remaining number of variations may also be expressed qualitatively, such as "not yet" or "a little bit more," or by a change in color. In FIG. 51(A), if YC=TH1 and TC≧TH2 and the suggestion information SJ is not displayed on the display screen 7a, the expected arrival information CD is not displayed at this point.

As shown in Figures 51 (E) and (F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are then displayed as stopped in a losing state, and after the reserved amount is consumed, the suggestion information SJ and the expected arrival information CD are maintained on the right sub-display screen 64R while the next variation of the special chart 1 is starting. When the next variation of the special chart 1 is starting, the counter value of the expected arrival information CD is decremented by 1. Here, the value is changed from "190" to "189".

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 51 (F), as shown in FIG. 51 (G), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC = TH3 = 50), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the expected arrival information CD is being displayed. If the expected arrival information CD is not being displayed, it is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. If it is already being displayed, the display of the expected arrival information CD continues. Here, the expected arrival information CD is already being displayed, and the counter value at this point is "150".

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 51 (G), as shown in FIG. 51 (H), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC = TH4 = 100), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not suggestion information SJ is being displayed. If suggestion information SJ is being displayed, the display is turned off. At this time, the display of expected arrival information CD is maintained. At this point, the counter value is "100". If suggestion information SJ is not being displayed, nothing in particular is done by this process.

After repeating the special chart 1 fluctuation several times from FIG. 51 (H), when the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This causes the game to enter b time-saving (play time). Here, the special chart 1 lottery is still being performed at the time of entry, so the special chart 1 lottery in the time-saving state is executed. During this fluctuation, a right-hit display is displayed, prompting the player to obtain the special chart 2 reservation. As shown in FIG. 51 (J), on the right sub-display screen 64R, the arrival schedule information CD is enlarged, and an enlargement effect is performed that spans the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. This effect allows the player to easily recognize that the number of fluctuations has reached the ceiling and the time-saving game of the play time has begun. The rest of this is the same as FIG. 52 (H) to (J) described later.

[Ceiling Reaching Indication Performance B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival suggestion performance B. The ceiling arrival suggestion performance B is a performance executed when the counter value TC of the ceiling performance counter is larger than the value YC of the overnight counter compared to the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A. The ceiling arrival suggestion performance is a performance that displays information (reach schedule information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state) to suggest the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached to the player. When the number of fluctuations reaches 500 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of fluctuations that reaches the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling. FIG. 52 (A) of the ceiling arrival suggestion performance B has the same performance content as FIG. 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A. That is, while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and a changing icon (the hold icon in question) 9C are displayed.

Here, the number of changes since the power of the gaming machine 1 was turned on is 10, and the value YC of the overnight effect counter is 10 (YC=10). The number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached is 290 (190 in the ceiling reach indication effect A), and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 290 (TC=290). That is, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off the previous day when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 300, and after the power is turned on the next day, 10 special chart changes have been made. In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, the first threshold value TH1=10, the third threshold value TH3=50, and the fourth threshold value TH4=100 are set (stored) as the threshold value for the overnight counter. Also, the second threshold value TH2=200 is set (stored) as the threshold value for the ceiling effect counter. Note that these threshold values are merely examples, and can be set to any numerical value.

As shown in FIG. 52(A), when the value YC of the overnight counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC=TH1=10), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is smaller than the second threshold value TH2 (=200). If TC is smaller than TH2 (TC<TH2), the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 51(B) of the ceiling reach suggestion effect A. On the other hand, since TC is equal to or greater than TH2 (TC=290≧TH2), the fluctuation ends without displaying the suggestion information SJ on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 52(B). The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (=200). Here, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 290, so it is not displayed. This allows the player to recognize that gaming machine 1 may have had its RAM cleared between the previous day and today.

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 52(B), as shown in FIG. 52(C), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC=TH3=50), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the expected arrival information CD is being displayed. If the expected arrival information CD is not being displayed, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the right sub-display screen 64R displays the expected arrival information CD. Here, since the expected arrival information CD was not being displayed, the expected arrival information CD with the counter value set to "250" is newly displayed. If the expected arrival information CD is already being displayed, the display of the expected arrival information CD continues.

As shown in Fig. 52 (E) and (F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are then displayed as missing, and after the reserved portion is consumed, the arrival schedule information CD is maintained on the right sub-display screen 64R while the next variation of the special chart 1 is started. When the next variation of the special chart 1 is started, the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD is decremented by 1. Here, the value is changed from "250" to "249". When the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC = TH4 = 100), the sub-control board 90 determines whether the suggestion information SJ (see Fig. 51 (G)) is displayed. If the suggestion information SJ is displayed, the display is turned off. Here, the suggestion information SJ is not displayed, so nothing is done by this process.

After repeating the special chart 1 fluctuation several times from FIG. 52 (F), when the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 52 (G), the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This causes the game to enter b time-saving (play time). Here, the special chart 1 lottery is still being performed at the time of entry, so the special chart 1 lottery in the time-saving state is executed. During this fluctuation, a right-hit display is displayed, prompting the player to obtain the special chart 2 reservation. As shown in FIG. 52 (H), on the right sub-display screen 64R, the arrival schedule information CD is enlarged, and an enlarged effect is performed that spans the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. This effect allows the player to easily recognize that the number of fluctuations has reached the ceiling and the time-saving game of the play time has begun.

After that, as shown in Figure 52 (I), the expected arrival information CD continues to expand, and "Yu-Time mode start!!!" is displayed in the inner area. This lets the player know that he has entered a new mode. After that, the expected arrival information CD disappears, and as shown in Figure 52 (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in a missing state, and after the reserved numbers are consumed, the next change in special chart 2 begins. On the right sub-display screen 64R, an image ND that indicates the remaining number of Yu-Time rounds is displayed as "699 remaining." This lets the player know the remaining number of b time reduction rounds.

[Ceiling Reaching Indication Performance C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling-reach-plan suggestion performance C. The ceiling-reach-plan suggestion performance is a performance that displays information (planned arrival information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the b-time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state) to suggest to the player the number of fluctuations (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 500 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the game state to the time reduction state (normal probability state, time reduction state, and high base state). Here, the number of fluctuations that reaches the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling. Among the ceiling-reach-plan suggestion performance C, FIG. 53 (A) to (E) show an example in which the suggestion information SJ is not displayed in the ceiling-reach-plan suggestion performance A. In Figure 53 (A), similar to Figure 51 (A) of the ceiling reaching expected indication performance A, three hold icons 9A and a variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed on the display screen 7a.

As in FIG. 51(A) of the ceiling reaching indication performance A, the number of changes since the power of the gaming machine 1 was turned on is 10, and the value YC of the overnight performance counter is 10 (YC=10). The number of remaining changes until the ceiling is reached is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is 190 (TC=190). That is, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off the previous day when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is 200, and after the power is turned on the next day, 10 special chart changes have been made. In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, the first threshold value TH1=10, the third threshold value TH3=50, and the fourth threshold value TH4=100 are set (stored) as the threshold value for the overnight counter. Also, the second threshold value TH2=200 is set (stored) as the threshold value for the ceiling performance counter. Note that these threshold values are merely examples, and can be set to any numerical value.

In FIG. 53(A), when the value YC of the overnight counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC=TH1=10), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is smaller than the second threshold value TH2 (=200). If TC is smaller than TH2 (TC<TH2), a random number is obtained, and depending on the random number value, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the display effect of the suggestive information SJ. Here, the suggestive information SJ is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 60%). FIG. 53(B) illustrates a state in which the fluctuation has ended without displaying the suggestive information SJ on the display screen 7a. Note that, if TC is equal to or greater than TH2 (TC≧TH2), the random number value is not obtained, and the suggestive information SJ is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The suggestive information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (=200). When this suggestion information SJ is displayed, the player can know that the gaming machine 1 has not had its RAM cleared from the previous day to today, and that the number of remaining fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached continues from the previous day.

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 53(B), as shown in FIG. 53(C), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC=TH3=50), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the expected arrival information CD is being displayed. If the expected arrival information CD is not being displayed, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the right sub-display screen 64R displays the expected arrival information CD. Here, the expected arrival information CD with the counter value now being "150" is newly displayed. If the expected arrival information CD is already being displayed, the display of the expected arrival information CD continues.

As shown in FIG. 53(D), after the expected arrival information CD is displayed, the display of the expected arrival information CD disappears at a predetermined timing until the change ends (until the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed). Note that the expected arrival information CD may disappear after repeating the special chart 1 change multiple times after being displayed. After repeating the special chart 1 change multiple times from FIG. 53(D), as shown in FIG. 53(E), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC=TH4=100), the sub-control board 90 displays the expected arrival information CD again. At this point, the counter value is "100". After that, the expected arrival information CD continues to be displayed until the counter value becomes "0", and then the same performance as in FIG. 52(G) to (J) is executed.

Figures 53 (F) to (J) show examples of different display timings and disappearance timings of the expected arrival information CD and the suggestion information SJ in the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A. As in Figure 51 (A) of the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A, the number of changes since the power of the gaming machine 1 was turned on is 10, and the value YC of the overnight performance counter is 10 (YC = 10). Also, the number of remaining changes until the ceiling is reached is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is 190 (TC = 190). In other words, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off the previous day when the value TC of the ceiling performance counter is 200, and after the power is turned on the next day, 10 special chart changes have been made. In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 10, the third threshold value TH3 = 50, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 100 are set (stored) as the threshold values for the overnight counter. In addition, a second threshold value TH2 = 200 is set (stored) as the threshold value for the ceiling effect counter. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to any value.

Figure 53 (F) corresponds to Figure 51 (A) of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance A. In Figure 53 (F), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (YC = TH1 = 10), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the ceiling performance counter value TC is smaller than the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). If TC is smaller than TH2 (TC < TH2), the right sub-display screen 64R displays the suggestion information SJ as shown in Figure 53 (F). On the other hand, if TC is equal to or greater than TH2 (TC ≥ TH2), the display screen 7a does not display the suggestion information SJ (Figure 52 (B)). The suggestion information SJ is an image that suggests to the player that the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached is less than the second threshold value TH2 (= 200). When this suggestion information SJ is displayed, the player can know that the gaming machine 1 has not had its RAM cleared from the previous day to today, and that the number of remaining fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached continues from the previous day. Unlike Figures 51 (B) to (C) of the ceiling reach suggestion performance A, the suggestion information SJ does not move to the right sub-display screen 64R after being displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the expected reach information CD is not displayed as the suggestion information SJ is displayed entirely on the right sub-display screen 64R.

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 53 (F), as shown in FIG. 53 (G), when the overnight counter value YC becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (YC = TH3 = 50), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the expected arrival information CD is being displayed. If the expected arrival information CD is not being displayed, it is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. If it is already being displayed, the display of the expected arrival information CD continues. In this case, since the expected arrival information CD was not being displayed, it is newly displayed with a counter value of "150".

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 53 (G), as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the overnight counter value YC is equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (YC = TH4 = 100). When YC = TH4, the suggestion information SJ and expected arrival information CD displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R are erased, and the suggestion information SJ and expected arrival information CD are newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

After repeating the Special Chart 1 variation several times from FIG. 53 (H), as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the overnight counter value YC is equal to the fifth threshold value TH5 (YC = TH5 = 150). When YC = TH5, the suggestion information SJ and expected reach information CD displayed on the display screen 7a are erased. This increases the sense of excitement for the player, as he or she will not know when the ceiling will be reached.

After repeating the special chart 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 53 (I), as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the sub-control board 90 judges whether the overnight counter value YC is equal to the sixth threshold value TH6 (YC = TH6 = 180). When YC = TH6, the display screen 7a displays the arrival schedule information CD again. After this, the display of the arrival schedule information CD continues until "0". When the counter value of the arrival schedule information CD becomes "0", the main control board 80 switches the game state from the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) to the time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state, and high base state). This causes the game to enter b time-saving (play time). Here, the special chart 1 lottery is still being performed at the time of entry, so the special chart 1 lottery in the time-saving state is executed. During this variation, a right-hit display is displayed, prompting the player to obtain the special chart 2 reservation. After that, it is the same as in FIG. 52 (G) to (J) described above.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the ceiling reaching indication.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 52 and 53, a main control board 80 is provided that switches the game state to a time-saving state when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches a specific number (here, 500 times), and in the normal state, when the number of fluctuations since the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on reaches a first predetermined number (Figure 52: YC = 50, Figure 53: YC = 50), a first performance can be executed in which the expected arrival information CD, which is information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number is reached, is displayed. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51 and 53, in the normal state, when the number of changes since the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on reaches a second predetermined number (Figure 51: YC = 10, Figure 53: YC = 10) which is less than the first predetermined number, and the remaining number of changes (TC) until the specific number is reached is less than a threshold value (TH2), a second presentation is displayed to show suggestive information SJ suggesting that the remaining number of changes is less than the threshold value. According to this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51, when the suggestion information SJ is displayed in the second presentation, the arrival schedule information CD is also displayed, and the arrival schedule information is continuously displayed until the number of changes since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on reaches the first predetermined number (YC = 50). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51, when the suggestion information SJ is displayed in the second performance, when the number of changes since the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on reaches a third predetermined number (YC = 100) which is greater than the first predetermined number (YC = 50) after the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the display of the suggestion information SJ disappears while the display of the expected arrival information CD continues. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51 to 53, in the second performance, the suggestion image (star-shaped graphic image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, then moves to the right sub-display screen 64R, and as the suggestion image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R by the movement, the arrival schedule information CD is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and to increase the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52, in the second presentation, when the number of changes since the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on reaches a second predetermined number (YC = 10), the suggestive information SJ may not be displayed even though the number of changes remaining (TC) until the specific number is reached is less than the threshold value (TH2). With this configuration, when the suggestive information SJ is not displayed, the player can be made to think whether the remaining number of changes has not reached the threshold value or has reached it but has not been displayed, and as a result, the player can be engrossed in the game and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the ceiling reaching indication effect.
[Modification 1]
In the ceiling reach forecast suggestion effects A to C, the suggestion information SJ and the expected reach information CD are described as being displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. However, the suggestion information SJ and the expected reach information CD may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L instead of the right sub-display screen 64R. Also, one of the suggestion information SJ and the expected reach information CD may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the other on the left sub-display screen 64L. Also, at least one of them may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the ceiling reaching scheduled indication performances A to C, the suggestion information SJ and the scheduled reaching information CD are displayed as images having shapes. However, the suggestion information SJ and the scheduled reaching information CD are not limited to images having shapes, as long as the content of each is notified to the player. For example, the suggestion information SJ and the scheduled reaching information CD may be notified by a part of the display screen 7a changing to a specific color, or may be notified by light emission. Also, for example, the color, shape, position, etc. of an image already displayed may be changed to notify. The scheduled reaching information CD may represent the number of remaining changes until the b time reduction (play time) is reached as a percentage of the total, or the ratio may be represented by a meter. Also, the number of remaining changes may be represented qualitatively, such as "not yet", "a little bit more", or a change in color.

[Modification 3]
In the ceiling arrival suggestion performance A, the suggestion information SJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, then moves toward the right sub-display screen 64R and is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. However, instead of moving toward the right sub-display screen 64R, the suggestion information SJ may disappear once after being displayed on the display screen 7a, and then be newly displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The arrival schedule information CD may be displayed by fading in or framing in. Or, it may be displayed after being issued.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a gaming state switching means for switching a gaming state to a second gaming state when the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches a specific number,
In the first gaming state, when the number of times of fluctuations after the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on reaches a first predetermined number of times, a first performance is executed in which information related to the number of times of fluctuations remaining until the specific number of times is reached is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
In the first gaming state, when the number of fluctuations since the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on reaches a second predetermined number which is less than the first predetermined number, and when the number of fluctuations remaining until the specific number is reached is less than a threshold, a second performance is executed in which suggestive information suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining is less than a threshold is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the second performance, when the suggestion information is displayed, the arrival schedule information is also displayed, and the arrival schedule information is continuously displayed until the number of fluctuations since the power-on of the gaming machine reaches the first predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-3,
When the suggestive information is displayed in the second performance, when the number of fluctuations since the power-on of the gaming machine reaches a third predetermined number, which is greater than the first predetermined number, after the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the display of the suggestive information disappears while the display of the expected arrival information is continued.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-3 or A1-4,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means,
The display of the suggestive information means that a suggestive image appears,
In the second performance, the suggestion image is displayed on the first display means, and then moved to the second display means, and the arrival schedule information is displayed on the second display means as the suggestion image is displayed on the second display means by the movement.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-2 to A1-5,
In the second presentation, when the number of fluctuations since the power-on of the gaming machine reaches the second predetermined number, the suggestive information may not be displayed even if the number of fluctuations remaining until the specific number is reached is less than the threshold value.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol changes during the low probability state (normal state) reaches 500 (when the ceiling counter reaches 0), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low probability time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The special character appearance effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 54 to 56. The special character appearance effect is executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, during the decorative pattern variation effect in the normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the special character appearance effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7.

The special character appearance effects A to C are executed when the following conditions 1 and 2 are met.
Condition 1: The number of times the special symbol changes after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is a threshold value TH1 (10 in this embodiment).
Condition 2: The value YC of the overnight performance counter fluctuates to be equal to or less than a threshold value TH2 (200 in this embodiment).
That is, these special character appearance effects A to C are performed when the special symbol changes when the value YC of the overnight effect counter becomes 10 (YC=10) (the value of YC is updated when the change ends). This change is the 10th change after the gaming machine 1 is turned off the previous day when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 200, and the power is turned on the next day. Also, at the time of this change (when the change starts), the number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached is 190, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 190 (TC=190).

[Special character appearance effect A]
Fig. 54 is a diagram for explaining the special character appearance effect A. The special character appearance effect A in Fig. 54 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol, and as described above, is an effect when the number of variations since the power of the gaming machine 1 becomes 10, that is, an effect when the value YC of the overnight effect counter becomes 10. At this time, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190, that is, if the special symbol varies 190 more times, the game will enter the play time. Note that the display of the reserved icon and the variable icon is omitted in Fig. 54, but in reality, these icons are displayed.

In the special character appearance performance A, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a decorative pattern change performance is first performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(B), a Yu-time suggestion image appearance presentation is performed. In this Yu-time suggestion image appearance presentation, a Yu-time suggestion image XA1 appears on the right sub-display screen 64R, and then the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. This Yu-time suggestion image XA1 is an image that suggests that the number of times the special pattern changes is within a predetermined number (here, a threshold value TH1:200) before it reaches the Yu-time, and is an image that represents an ally character. This Yu-time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the chance image described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(C), a display of the number of times that the Yu-time has been reached is performed. In this display of the number of times that the Yu-time has been reached, the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the Yu-time reach count image XA2 is displayed in a different position from the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yu-time reach count image XA2 is an image that indicates the number of times remaining until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the Yu-time. In the example of FIG. 54, the Yu-time reach count image XA2 is displayed as "190 times left until the Yu-time".

Next, as shown in Fig. 54 (D), the Yu-time suggestion image exiting appearance is performed. In this Yu-time suggestion image exiting appearance, the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 exits (is erased) from the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64 while the Yu-time reach count image XA2 continues to be displayed.
Thereafter, the variation of the special symbol accompanied by the special character appearance performance A ends, but the Yu-time reaching count image XA2 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a until the Yu-time is reached or a big win occurs.

[Special character appearance effect B]
Fig. 55 is a diagram for explaining the special character appearance effect B. The special character appearance effect B in Fig. 55 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol, and as described above, is an effect when the number of variations of the special symbol since the power-on of the gaming machine 1 reaches 10, that is, an effect when the value YC of the overnight effect counter reaches 10. At this time, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190, that is, if the special symbol varies 190 more times, the game will enter the play time. Note that the display of the reserved icon and the variable icon is omitted in Fig. 55, but in reality, these icons are displayed.

In the special character appearance effect B, as shown in FIG. 55(A), a decorative pattern change effect is first performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(B), a Yu-time suggestion image appearance presentation is performed. In this Yu-time suggestion image appearance presentation, a Yu-time suggestion image XA1 appears on the right sub-display screen 64R, and then the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. This Yu-time suggestion image XA1 is an image that suggests that the number of times the special pattern changes is within a predetermined number (here, a threshold value TH1:200) before it reaches the Yu-time, and is an image that represents an ally character. This Yu-time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the chance image described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(C), the Yu-time suggestion image exit appearance is performed. In this Yu-time suggestion image exit appearance, the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 exits (is erased) from the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(D), a display of the number of times that the Yu-Time has been reached is performed. In this display of the number of times that the Yu-Time has been reached, a Yu-Time reach count image XA2 is displayed in a different position from the Yu-Time suggestion image XA1 that was displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yu-Time reach count image XA2 is an image that indicates the number of times remaining until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the Yu-Time. In the example of FIG. 55, the Yu-Time reach count image XA2 indicates "190 times left until the Yu-Time".

Next, as shown in Fig. 55 (E), an image matching effect is performed. In this image matching effect, the play time suggestion image XA1 appears again on the display screen 7a, and the play time suggestion image XA1 is displayed so as to be associated with the play time arrival count image XA2 that is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.
Thereafter, the variation of the special symbol accompanied by the special character appearance performance B ends, but the Yu-time reaching count image XA2 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a until the Yu-time is reached or a big win occurs.

[Special character appearance effect C]
Fig. 56 is a diagram for explaining the special character appearance effect C. The special character appearance effect C in Fig. 56 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol, and as described above, is an effect when the number of variations since the power supply of the gaming machine 1 becomes 10, that is, an effect when the value YC of the overnight effect counter becomes 10. At this time, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 190, that is, if the special symbol varies 190 more times, the game will enter the play time. Note that the display of the reserved icon and the variable icon is omitted in Fig. 56, but in reality, these icons are displayed.

In the special character appearance effect C, as shown in FIG. 56(A), a decorative pattern change effect is first performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), a Yu-time suggestion image appearance presentation is performed. In this Yu-time suggestion image appearance presentation, a Yu-time suggestion image XA1 appears on the right sub-display screen 64R, and then the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. This Yu-time suggestion image XA1 is an image that suggests that the number of times the special pattern changes is within a predetermined number (here, a threshold value TH1:200) until it reaches the Yu-time, and is an image that represents an ally character. This Yu-time suggestion image XA1 corresponds to the chance image described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the Yu-time suggestion image exit appearance is performed. In this Yu-time suggestion image exit appearance, the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 exits (is erased) from the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), a Yu-time reach count display effect is performed. In this Yu-time reach count display effect, a Yu-time reach count image XA2 is displayed in a different position from the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 that was displayed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the Yu-time reach count image XA2 is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. This Yu-time reach count image XA2 is an image that indicates the number of times remaining until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the Yu-time. In the example of FIG. 56, the Yu-time reach count image XA2 is displayed as "190 more times until Yu-time."

Next, as shown in Fig. 56 (E), an image matching effect is performed. In this image matching effect, a play time suggestion image XA1 appears on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the play time suggestion image XA1 is displayed so as to be associated with a play time arrival count image XA2 that is continuously displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L.
Thereafter, the variation of the special symbol accompanied by the special character appearance performance C ends, but the Yu-time reaching count image XA2 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a until the Yu-time is reached or a big win occurs.

[Modification]
If the above conditions 1 and 2 are not met, the special character appearance effects A to C are not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character appearance effects A to C may be performed when only condition 1 is met, or when only condition 2 is met.

In addition, even if the above special character appearance effects A to C are not performed because the above conditions 1 and 2 are not met, the above special character appearance effects A to C may be performed when the number of changes since power-on reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) even if the above conditions 1 and 2 are not met.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/397.1, and the integer part of the probability denominator of the jackpot probability is 397. The Yu-time suggestion image XA1 of the special symbol character appearance effects A to C may be configured to be displayed when the number of times the special symbol changes until the Yu-time occurs is within the number of integer parts of the probability denominator of the jackpot probability (397 times) after the power is turned on.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special character appearance performance A, the Yu-time reaching count image XA2 continues to be displayed even when the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64, but this is not limited to the above, and when the Yu-time suggestion image XA1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64, the Yu-time reaching count image XA2 may also be erased.

[Example of effect]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance performances A to C, after the power is turned on, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times, and in the predetermined change, the play time reaching count image XA2 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64, and the play time suggestion image XA1 is displayed at a position (second position) different from the position where the play time reaching count image XA2 was displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. According to this configuration, in the predetermined change after the power is turned on, the play time suggestion image XA1 and the play time reaching count image XA2 suddenly appear, so that the player can rapidly increase his or her expectation of entering the play time, and can simultaneously give a sense of surprise and a sense of excitement in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the YU-TIME suggestion image XA1 and the YU-TIME reaching count image XA2 are displayed in association with each other in the special symbol character appearance performances B to C. This configuration can give the player a greater sense of expectation for the YU-TIME, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the play-time reaching count image XA2 is displayed after the play-time suggestion image XA1 has disappeared in the special symbol character appearance performances B to C. According to this configuration, the play-time suggestion image XA1 and the play-time reaching count image XA2 are displayed at different times, so that the player's expectations for the play-time can be further increased, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance presentations A to C, the play time reaching count image XA2 is displayed when the number of times the special symbol changes after the power is turned on reaches the first threshold value TH1 (10 times). With this configuration, the player can feel excited until the number of times the special symbol changes after the power is turned on reaches the first threshold value TH1, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol character appearance presentations A to C, the play time suggestion image XA1 is displayed when the number of times the special symbol changes after the power is turned on reaches the first threshold value TH1 (10 times). With this configuration, the player can be given a sense of excitement until the number of times the special symbol changes after the power is turned on reaches the first threshold value TH1, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The gaming machine is configured such that a game is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state which is relatively unfavorable to a player and a second gaming state which is relatively favorable to a player, and when the number of times that the special symbols change in the first gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state transitions to the second gaming state;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a remaining number of times at a first position of the display means, the remaining number of times indicating the remaining number of times until the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the predetermined number of times,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a suggestion image at a second position different from the first position, the suggestion image suggesting that the number of times of change of the special symbol is within the first number of times until it reaches the predetermined number of times,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the suggestion image and the remaining number of times display in association with each other at the first position,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed after the display of the suggestion image in the second display performance disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
In the combination presentation, the remaining number display in the first display presentation is displayed when the number of times of the special symbols becomes a second number after the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination presentation, the suggestion display in the second display presentation is displayed when the number of times of the special symbols becomes a second number after the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
The probability of winning a jackpot in the gaming machine is 1/N (N is a number greater than 1),
The first number of times is equal to the integer part of N.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning notification effects A to C are explained below using Figures 57 to 59. These winning notification effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a winning notification effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Win notification effect A]
57 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification performance A. The winning notification performance is a performance executed when a jackpot is notified during or after the special chart change. Here, after the jackpot game, the game state switches to a time-saving state (low probability time-saving state or high probability time-saving state), and the special chart 1 change is executed in the time-saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 57(A), during the ending presentation of the big win game, the sub-control board 90 displays a presentation mode selection screen on the display screen 7a. The presentation mode selection screen includes a presentation mode selection image MSG, a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation prompt image RND.

The presentation mode selection image MSG is an image for selecting the presentation mode displayed during variable presentation during the time-saving state after a jackpot game. Selecting a presentation mode means selecting one of the pre-set main display contents, presentation contents, story contents, etc. displayed during the variable presentation. Here, as an example, two presentation modes, "presentation mode A" and "presentation mode B", are displayed as selectable. "Presentation mode A" is a mode in which a special presentation is executed, and "presentation mode B" is a mode in which a battle presentation is executed.

The button image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that indicates the validity period for operating the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that indicates the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and an image of the word "select", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect mode selected from the effect mode selection image MSG is switched. The panel representing the selected effect mode changes color to make it identifiable. The effect mode selected when the operation valid period expires (the effect mode in which the panel is active) is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch between multiple effect modes and executes the selected effect mode. Here, an example is explained in which "effect mode A" is selected. When an effect mode is selected, the ending effect of the big win game ends and the variation of the special chart 1 in the time-saving state begins. On the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection screen is switched to a variation display screen of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. When the select button 68 is operated during the variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the sub-control board 90 displays the effect setting screen on the right sub-display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 57 (B).

The effect setting screen includes a setting selection image EG, a button image BTN, and an operation prompting image RND. The setting selection image EG is an image for selecting the effect setting of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. Selecting an effect setting means selecting one of the effect effects, effect frequency, effect mode, screen settings, etc. that have been set in advance. Here, as an example, the effect settings "flashy" and "plain" are displayed as selectable settings. "Flashy" is a setting in which the effect effect and effect mode are flashy and the effect frequency is high, while "plain" is a setting in which the effect effect and effect mode are plain and the effect frequency is low. The button image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a text image that reads "select," and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect setting selected from the setting selection image EG is switched. The panel representing the selected effect setting changes color to make it identifiable. The effect setting selected by operating the effect button 63 or the select button 68 (the effect setting whose panel is active) is then executed. In other words, the sub-control board 90 can switch between multiple effect settings, and executes the selected effect setting. Here, an example is given in which "flashy" is selected. While the effect setting screen is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a displays the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, two reserved icons 9A, and a changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(C), when the display screen 7a continues to display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a light-emitting effect is executed on the right sub-display screen 64R. Specifically, a light-emitting image FL showing the state in which light is emitted (light-emitting state) is displayed once on a part (predetermined area) of the right sub-display screen 64R, and then, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the display disappears. As a result, a performance is executed in which a part of the right sub-display screen 64R emits light and returns to its original state. When this light-emitting effect appears, a win is confirmed. That is, this light-emitting effect notifies the player that the special drawing result corresponding to the change is a win. In this way, in the winning notification performance of this embodiment, while the display screen 7a displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a light-emitting image FL notifying the player of a big win is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In other words, in this embodiment, the player is notified of the jackpot before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the jackpot mode.

After this light emission effect, as shown in FIG. 57(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the form of a big win. Here, they are displayed as stopped in the form of "333." The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the form of a win without going through the reach mode. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as variable patterns, but suddenly stop and are displayed as "333." This can take the player by surprise. Alternatively, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed as variable patterns, but then fade out and disappear, with "333" framing in from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the form of a big win disappear, and the first movable part 14, which had retreated to the left end of the display screen 7a, starts moving to the right. As shown in FIG. 57(G), when the first movable part 14 moves to the right, a win notification screen is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a after the first movable part 14 has passed. The win notification screen includes a text image of "Win!!!" and a background image of a specific color. The win notification screen is displayed in order from the left side in the area after the first movable part 14 has passed. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(H), when the first movable part 14 reaches the right end of the display screen 7a, it stops there once, and at this time, the entire display screen 7a becomes the win notification screen. After that, the first movable part 14 starts moving to the left, and at the same time, the display of the win notification screen disappears from the right side of the win notification screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the first movable part 14 returns to its original retreat position on the left side. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed stopped on the display screen 7a in the form of a big win.

[Win notification effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B. The winning notification effect B has a different effect setting selected on the effect setting screen from the winning notification effect A. The winning notification effect is an effect that is executed when a jackpot is notified during or after the special pattern change. Here, after a jackpot game, the game state switches to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state or high-probability time-saving state), and the special pattern 1 change is executed in the time-saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 58(A), during the ending presentation of a big win game, the sub-control board 90 displays a presentation mode selection screen on the display screen 7a. The presentation mode selection screen includes a presentation mode selection image MSG, a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation prompt image RND.

The presentation mode selection image MSG is an image for selecting the presentation mode displayed during variable presentation during the time-saving state after a jackpot game. Selecting a presentation mode means selecting one of the pre-set main display contents, presentation contents, story contents, etc. displayed during the variable presentation. Here, as an example, two presentation modes, "presentation mode A" and "presentation mode B", are displayed as selectable. "Presentation mode A" is a mode in which a special presentation is executed, and "presentation mode B" is a mode in which a battle presentation is executed.

The button image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that indicates the validity period for operating the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that indicates the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and an image of the word "select", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect mode selected from the effect mode selection image MSG is switched. The panel representing the selected effect mode changes color to make it identifiable. The effect mode selected when the operation valid period expires (the effect mode in which the panel is active) is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch between multiple effect modes and executes the selected effect mode. Here, an example is explained in which "effect mode A" is selected. When an effect mode is selected, the ending effect of the big win game ends and the variation of the special chart 1 in the time-saving state begins. On the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection screen is switched to a variation display screen of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. When the select button 68 is operated during the variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the sub-control board 90 displays the effect setting screen on the right sub-display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 58 (B).

The effect setting screen includes a setting selection image EG, a button image BTN, and an operation prompting image RND. The setting selection image EG is an image for selecting the effect setting of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. Selecting an effect setting means selecting one of the effect effects, effect frequency, effect mode, screen settings, etc. that have been set in advance. Here, as an example, the effect settings "flashy" and "plain" are displayed as selectable settings. "Flashy" is a setting in which the effect effect and effect mode are flashy and the effect frequency is high, while "plain" is a setting in which the effect effect and effect mode are plain and the effect frequency is low. The button image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a text image that reads "select," and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect setting selected from the setting selection image EG is switched. The panel representing the selected effect setting changes color to make it identifiable. The effect setting selected by operating the effect button 63 or the select button 68 (the effect setting whose panel is active) is then executed. In other words, the sub-control board 90 can switch between multiple effect settings, and executes the selected effect setting. Here, an example is given in which "plain" is selected. While the effect setting screen is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a displays the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, two reserved icons 9A, and a changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(C), while the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, the display of the performance setting screen disappears. After that, at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 58(D), a notification image AH notifying a win is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. The notification image AH in this embodiment is a star-shaped graphic image, and is displayed at the bottom right of the right sub-display screen 64R. The notification image AH continues to be displayed after it is displayed. When this notification image AH appears, a win is confirmed. In other words, the appearance of this notification image AH notifies the user that the special drawing result corresponding to the change is a win. Thus, in the winning notification performance of this embodiment, while the display screen 7a displays the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a notification image AH notifying a big win is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In other words, in this embodiment, the player is notified of the jackpot before the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the jackpot mode.

After this winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 58(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the form of a big win. Here, they are displayed as stopped in the form of "333." The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the form of a win without going through the reach mode. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as variable patterns, but suddenly stop and are displayed as "333." This can take the player by surprise. Alternatively, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed as variable patterns, but then fade out and disappear, with "333" framing in from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

On the right sub-display screen 64R, the notification image AH continues to be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win disappear, and the first movable gadget 14 that had retreated to the left end of the display screen 7a starts moving to the right. As shown in FIG. 58(G), when the first movable gadget 14 moves to the right, a win notification screen is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a after the first movable gadget 14 has passed. The win notification screen includes a text image of "Win!!!" and a background image of a specific color. The win notification screen is displayed in order from the left side in the area after the first movable gadget 14 has passed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(H), when the first movable gadget 14 reaches the right end of the display screen 7a, it stops there once, and at this time, the entire display screen 7a becomes a win notification screen. After that, the first movable part 14 starts moving to the left, and at the same time, the display of the winning notification screen disappears from the right side of the winning notification screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(I), the first movable part 14 returns to its original retreat position on the left side. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed stopped in the form of a big win on the display screen 7a. Between FIG. 58(D) and (J), the notification image AH continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

[Win notification effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification performance C. The winning notification performance C is different from the winning notification performance A in the performance mode selection screen. The winning notification performance is a performance that is executed when a jackpot is notified during or after the special chart change. Here, after a jackpot game, the game state switches to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state or high-probability time-saving state), and the special chart 1 change is executed in the time-saving state.

First, as shown in FIG. 59(A), during the ending presentation of the big win game, the sub-control board 90 displays a presentation mode selection screen on the display screen 7a. The presentation mode selection screen includes a presentation mode selection image MSG, a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation prompt image RND.

The presentation mode selection image MSG is an image for selecting the presentation mode displayed during variable presentation during the time-saving state after a jackpot game. Selecting a presentation mode means selecting one of the pre-set main display contents, presentation contents, story contents, etc. displayed during the variable presentation. Here, as an example, two presentation modes, "presentation mode A" and "presentation mode B", are displayed as selectable. "Presentation mode A" is a mode in which a special presentation is executed, and "presentation mode B" is a mode in which a battle presentation is executed.

The button image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that indicates the validity period for operating the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that indicates the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and an image of the word "select", and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect mode selected from the effect mode selection image MSG is switched. The panel representing the selected effect mode changes color to make it identifiable. The effect mode selected when the operation valid period expires (the effect mode in which the panel is active) is then executed. That is, the sub-control board 90 can switch between multiple effect modes and executes the selected effect mode. Here, an example is explained in which "effect mode B" is selected. When an effect mode is selected, the ending effect of the big win game ends and the variation of the special chart 1 in the time-saving state begins. On the display screen 7a, the effect mode selection screen is switched to a variation display screen of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. When the select button 68 is operated during the variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the sub-control board 90 displays the effect setting screen on the right sub-display screen 64R, as shown in FIG. 59 (B).

The effect setting screen includes a setting selection image EG, a button image BTN, and an operation prompting image RND. The setting selection image EG is an image for selecting the effect setting of the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64. Selecting an effect setting means selecting one of the effect effects, effect frequency, effect mode, screen settings, etc. that have been set in advance. Here, as an example, the effect settings "flashy" and "plain" are displayed as selectable settings. "Flashy" is a setting in which the effect effect and effect mode are flashy and the effect frequency is high, while "plain" is a setting in which the effect effect and effect mode are plain and the effect frequency is low. The button image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image that indicates the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a text image that reads "select," and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the effect setting selected from the setting selection image EG is switched. The panel representing the selected effect setting changes color to make it identifiable. The effect setting selected by operating the effect button 63 or the select button 68 (the effect setting whose panel is active) is then executed. In other words, the sub-control board 90 can switch between multiple effect settings, and executes the selected effect setting. Here, an example is given in which "flashy" is selected. While the effect setting screen is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a displays the changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, two reserved icons 9A, and a changing icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state on the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R each temporarily stop at "3", becoming "3↓3". After that, as shown in FIG. 59(D), a battle performance is executed. Specifically, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an image of them fighting is displayed. The "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is reduced and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. The "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the right sub-display screen 64R while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear, and the first movable gadget 14, which had retreated to the left end of the display screen 7a, starts moving to the right. As shown in FIG. 59(F), when the first movable gadget 14 moves to the right, a special background image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a after the first movable gadget 14 has passed. The special background image is a background image different from the background image when the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB were displayed, and suggests that the result of the match between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will finally be announced. The special background image is displayed in order from the left side in the area after the first movable gadget 14 has passed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(G), when the first movable gadget 14 reaches the right end of the display screen 7a, it stops there once, and at this time, the entire display screen 7a becomes a special background image. After that, the first movable part 14 starts moving to the left, and at the same time, the display of the special background image disappears from the right side of the special background image. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the first movable part 14 returns to its original retreat position on the left side. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the result of the match between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. Here, the state in which the ally character CRA has defeated the enemy character CRB is illustrated. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed stopped in the form of a jackpot on the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the winning notification effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57(C) and Fig. 58(D), the first effect that notifies a win can be executed in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. This configuration can take the player by surprise, and can increase the interest by providing a novel effect that has never been seen before.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(D)(E) and 58(D)(E), after the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop on a winning symbol (for example, "333") without going through a reach state. This configuration can take the player by surprise, and can increase the interest by providing a novel performance that has never been seen before.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(E)-(J) and 58(E)-(J), after the second performance, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped with the winning symbol (for example, "333") disappears, and the first movable role 14 moves from the retreat position at the left end to the advance position at the right end in a third performance, and after the third performance, the first movable role 14 moves from the advance position to the retreat position, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped with the winning symbol (for example, "333") are displayed again in a fourth performance. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57(C), in the first presentation, a predetermined area of the display screen 7a is illuminated to notify the player of a win. With this configuration, a novel presentation not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a sub-control board 90 capable of switching among a plurality of presentation settings, as shown in Figures 57 and 58, and when a first setting (flashy) is selected among the plurality of presentation settings, the notification of a win in the first presentation is made by illuminating a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, and when a second setting (plain) is selected among the plurality of presentation settings, the notification of a win in the first presentation is made by displaying a notification image AH on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel presentation not seen before can be provided to visually entertain the player, and interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57 and 58, in the first performance, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the winning notification is made on the right sub-display screen 64R. With this configuration, people who are concentrating on the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a do not notice it, and only people who know this performance can notice the winning notification, which gives a sense of superiority and improves interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 57 and 58, the sub-control board 90 displays a setting selection image EG showing a plurality of effect settings and an operation means image BTN for selecting the effect setting on the right sub-display screen 64R. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and to increase the interest of the player.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the winning notification presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the winning notification performances A and B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the display stops in a winning state without going into a reach state. However, in the winning notification performances A and B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed in a variable manner, and then go through a reach state before stopping in a winning state.

[Modification 2]
In the winning notification effects A to C, the effect setting screen has been described as being displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. However, the effect setting screen may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or on the display screen 7a, instead of the right sub-display screen 64R. Also, the effect mode selection screen has been described as being displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the effect mode selection screen may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, instead of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the winning notification performance A, as shown in FIG. 57(C), a light-emitting image FL showing a state where light is emitted (light-emitting state) is displayed in a part (predetermined area) of the right sub-display screen 64R to notify the player of the winning. However, the winning notification is not limited to a form of displaying an image having a shape, as long as the winning is notified to the player. For example, the winning may be notified by a part of the right sub-display screen 64R changing to a specific color, or the winning may be notified by the entire right sub-display screen 64R emitting light. Also, for example, the winning may be notified by changing the color, shape, position, etc. of an image that has already been displayed. When visually notifying the winning, not only the right sub-display screen 64R but also the left sub-display screen 64L or the display screen 7a may be used. Also, the winning may be notified by generating a sound or moving a role. Furthermore, the winning may be notified by emitting light from a light-emitting part provided in the role.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
A first performance that notifies a win while the decorative pattern variation display is displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the decorative symbol stops at a winning symbol without going through a reach mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2 further comprises:
The device includes a movable part that can be moved between a first position and a second position,
After the second performance, the display of the decorative pattern stopped at the winning pattern disappears, and the movable role moves from the first position to the second position.
After the third performance, the movable part moves from the second position to the first position, and the decorative pattern that has stopped as a winning pattern is displayed again.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first performance, the winning notification is performed by emitting light from a predetermined area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-4 further comprises:
Equipped with a switching means that can switch between multiple performance settings,
When a first setting, which is one of the plurality of performance settings, is selected, in the first performance, the notification of the win is performed by causing a predetermined area of the display means to emit light;
When a second setting, which is another one of the plurality of performance settings, is selected, in the first performance, the notification of the win is performed by displaying a specific image on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means,
In the first performance, the display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the first display means, and the notification of the winning is performed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-6 further comprises:
The game machine is provided with an operating means operable by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the operation means;
The switching means causes the second display means to display a setting selection image representing the plurality of performance settings and the operation means image for selecting the performance setting.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the sound reach performance using FIG. 60, and the silent reach performances A to B using FIG. 61 and 62. The sound reach performance and the silent reach performances A to B are executed during the decorative pattern change performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the sound reach performance or the silent reach performances A to B is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7. Note that the sound reach performance is classified into a performance based on the variation pattern of a miss and a performance based on the variation pattern of a big win, and the example in FIG. 60 below shows a performance based on the variation pattern of a miss. The silent reach performances A and B are also classified into a performance based on the variation pattern of a miss and a performance based on the variation pattern of a big win, and the following FIG. 61 and 62 show a performance based on the variation pattern of a big win.

[Sound Reach Performance]
60 is a diagram for explaining the sound reach effect. The sound reach effect in FIG. 60 is an effect with the same variation in the special symbol.

In the sound reach performance, as shown in FIG. 60(A), first, a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 60, a hold icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), reach effect 1 is performed. In reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, a "ja-ki-n ja-ki-n" sound effect is output from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), reach effect 2 is performed. In reach effect 2, the ally character transforms, and the transformed ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect output from speaker 67 is changed, and the sound effect "Piroriron~♪ Piroriron~♪" is output from speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), reach effect 3 is performed. In reach effect 3, ally character XB1 continues to be displayed after transformation. At this time, the sound effect output from speaker 67 is changed, and a "chakeen chakeen" sound effect (sound effect) is output from speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a loss notification effect is performed. In this loss notification effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as loss patterns. In the example of FIG. 60(E), decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "6", decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7", and decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "6".

In the above reach effects 1 to 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, but this is not limited to the above, and the reach state may be formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As an example of the reach state, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol "6", and the decorative symbol 8C is changing.

[Silent Reach A]
61 is a diagram for explaining the silent reach effect A. The silent reach effect A in FIG. 61 is an effect with the same variation in the special symbol.

In silent reach performance A, as shown in FIG. 61(A), first, a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 61, a hold icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), reach effect 1 is performed. In reach effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, a "ja-ki-n ja-ki-n" sound effect is output from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), reach effect 2 is performed. In reach effect 2, the ally character transforms, and the transformed ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the output of the performance sound (sound effect) from the speaker 67 is stopped, that is, a silent performance is performed. Note that even during this silent performance, the display screen 7a does not freeze (does not go dark or become a still image), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change and the movement of the ally character XB1 is also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), reach effect 3 is performed. In reach effect 3, ally character XB1 continues to be displayed after transformation. At this time, a sound effect (sound effect) is output again from speaker 67. In this case, a "chakeen chakeen" sound effect (sound effect) is output from speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as jackpot patterns. In the example of FIG. 61(E), decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "7", decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7", and decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "7".

In the above reach effects 1 to 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, but this is not limited to the above, and the reach state may be formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As an example of the reach state, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8C is changing.

[Silent Reach Performance B]
Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the silent reach effect B. The silent reach effect B in Fig. 62 is an effect with the same variation in the special symbol.

In silent reach performance B, as shown in FIG. 62(A), first, a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative pattern change performance, a patrol lamp image XB2 is displayed. Note that in FIG. 62, a hold icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), reach performance 1 is performed. In reach performance 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, a "ja-ki-n ja-ki-n" sound effect is output from the speaker 67. Also, in reach performance 1, the patrol lamp image XB2 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), reach performance 2 is performed. In reach performance 2, the ally character transforms, and the transformed ally character XB1 is displayed. At this time, the output of the performance sound (sound effect) from the speaker 67 is stopped, that is, a silent performance is performed. Also, in reach performance 2, the patrol lamp image XB2 continues to be displayed. Note that even during this silent performance, the display screen 7a does not freeze (does not go dark or become a still image), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change and the movement performance of the ally character XB1 is also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a one-shot announcement effect is performed. In this one-shot announcement effect, the transformed ally character XB1 continues to be displayed. At this time, the effect sound (sound effect) is output again from the speaker 67. In this case, a "ping-pong" effect sound (sound effect) is output from the speaker 67. Also, in this one-shot announcement effect, the patrol lamp image XB2 continues to be displayed, and at the timing when the silent state of reach effect 2 changes to the sound state of the one-shot announcement effect, the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 flashes (or lights up).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), reach performance 3 is performed. In reach performance 3, the transformed ally character XB1 continues to be displayed. At this time, a performance sound (sound effect) is output again from the speaker 67. In this case, a performance sound (sound effect) of "Ja-ki-n, Ja-ki-n" is output from the speaker 67. Also, in reach performance 3, the patrol lamp image XB2 continues to be displayed, and the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 also continues to flash (or light up).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as jackpot patterns. In the example of FIG. 62(E), decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "7", decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "7", and decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "7".

In the above reach effects 1 to 3 and the one-shot announcement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, but this is not limited to this, and the reach state may be formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As an example of the reach state, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol "7", and the decorative symbol 8C is changing.

The above-mentioned sound reach performance and the above-mentioned silent reach performance A have the same length of reach performances 1 to 3, the same core display performance pattern, and are formed to have the same appearance. In other words, the sound reach performance and the silent reach performance A are formed in the same way in reach performances 1 to 3, such as the display position of the ally character XB1, the dialogue, the background, and the effects, but are different in terms of whether or not there is a silent performance. However, this is not limited to this, and the sound reach performance and the silent reach performance A may have different configurations for the display performance of parts other than reach performances 1 to 3, and even in the reach performances 1 to 3, some parts may be different (for example, the display position of the ally character XB1 is different, or some of the effects or background are different).

Furthermore, in the above sound performance, sound performance part 2 may be performed in which the patrol lamp image XB2 is displayed in the same display position as the silent reach performance B. In this case, the sound reach performance part 2 and the silent reach performance B have the same length as the reach performances 1 to 3, have the same core display performance pattern, and are formed in the same visible display performance. In other words, the sound reach performance part 2 and the silent reach performance B are formed in the same display position of the patrol lamp image XB2, the display position of the ally character XB1, the lines, the background, the effects, etc. in the reach performances 1 to 3, and are different in terms of whether or not there is a silent performance. Note that this is not limited to this, and the sound reach performance and the silent reach performance B may have different display performances in parts other than the reach performances 1 to 3, and may also have partially different configurations in the reach performances 1 to 3 (for example, the display position of the ally character XB1 is different, or some of the effects or background are different).

[Modification]
The silent reach effects A and B are effects that have a higher expectation of a big win than the sound reach effects. The silent reach effects A and B are effects that have a higher expectation of a big win than the sound reach effects. Although the silent reach effects A and B are effects that have a big win, they may be performed when there is a fluctuation in the miss. Even in this case, the silent reach effects A and B are effects that have a higher expectation of a big win than the sound reach effects.
In the above silent reach performance B, in the one-shot announcement performance, the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 flashes (or lights up) at the timing when the silent state of reach performance 2 changes to the sound state of the one-shot announcement performance, but this is not limited to this, and the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 may flash (light up) from the silent state of reach performance 2 and then change to the sound state, or the patrol lamp portion of the patrol lamp image XB2 may flash (light up) after changing from the silent state of reach performance 2 to the sound state.
In the above silent reach performances A and B, during the silent performance of reach performance 2, the display screen 7a is configured not to freeze (does not go dark or show a still image), but it may also freeze (may go dark or show a still image).

[Example of effect]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after reach performance 1, silent reach performances A and B are performed in reach performance 2. This configuration gives the player a momentary sense of discomfort, enhancing the player's sense of expectation for the reach performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after reach effect 1, a sound reach effect is performed in which reach effect 2, which is a sound effect, is performed. Silent reach effects A and B are effects that have a higher expectation of a big win than sound reach effects. With this configuration, the player feels a sense of incongruity when a silent effect occurs, and since the expectation of a big win is high at that time, the player can associate the sense of incongruity with the expectation of a big win, providing a new approach to increasing the player's interest. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the silent reach effects A and B, after the reach effect 2, which is a silent effect, a big win notification effect that displays a big win symbol is performed. With this configuration, the player feels a strange feeling when the silent effect occurs, and then the big win occurs, so that the strange feeling can be more strongly associated with the expectation of the big win, and a new approach can be provided to increase the interest of the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the silent reach effect B, a single notification effect is performed after the reach effect 2, which is a silent effect, and before the big win notification effect that displays the big win symbol. With this configuration, the player is surprised by the single notification of the big win after feeling strange about the silent effect, so that the strange feeling can be more strongly associated with the expectation of the big win, and a new approach to increasing the interest of the player can be provided. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the silent reach performance B, the patrol lamp image XB2 is flashed (or lit) in a one-shot notification performance to directly notify the player of the big win. With this configuration, the player feels uneasy about the silent performance, and then is surprised to be notified of the big win by the flashing of the patrol lamp image XB2. This makes it possible to more strongly associate the feeling of uneasiness with the expectation of the big win, and provides a new approach to increasing the interest of the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
A sound effect generating means capable of generating a sound effect;
Equipped with
A first effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
A second effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
the first performance is a performance in which a first display performance is performed on the display means and a sound performance is performed by the sound performance generating means to generate the performance sound,
the second performance is a performance in which a second display performance is performed on the display means and a silent performance in which the performance sound is not generated from the performance sound generating means,
A first combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed,
In the first combination performance, the first performance is performed, and then the second performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
A third effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
the third performance is a performance in which the second display performance is performed on the display means and an audible performance is performed by generating the performance sound from the performance sound generating means;
A second combination effect including the first effect and the third effect may be performed,
In the second combination effect, the first effect is performed, and then the third effect is performed;
The first combination effect is an effect having a higher expectation of a big win than the second combination effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A fourth effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
The fourth effect is an effect of displaying a big win symbol on the display means,
The first combination effect may include the fourth effect,
In the first combination performance, the fourth performance is performed after the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
A fifth effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
The fifth effect is an effect of displaying a one-shot notification image on the display means to notify the player of a jackpot in one shot,
The first combination effect may include the fifth effect,
In the first combination effect, the fifth effect is performed before the fourth effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the fifth performance of the first combination performance, the one-shot notification image is displayed in a predetermined area of the display means;
The one-shot notification image is a flashing image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The vibration effects A to C are described below with reference to Figures 63 to 65. These vibration effects A to C are executed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, during the display of the decorative symbols, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command to execute the vibration effects A to C is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64 of the image display device 7, and vibrates the vibration motor arranged inside the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. At this time, a vibration sound as a sound effect is also generated from the speaker 67.
In addition, when the number of reserved icons 9A on the display screen 7a changes from two to three (when the number of reserved balls at the first starting port changes from two to three), the sub-control board 90 can vibrate the vibration motor (vibrate the effect button 63) to perform an additional reserved vibration effect. In the gaming machine 1, the player can set whether or not to perform this additional reserved vibration effect in the customer waiting mode (during the demo screen) or while the special symbol is changing. In the sub-display screen 64, the player can select whether or not to set the additional reserved vibration effect to be performed in the customer waiting mode (during the demo screen) or while the special symbol is changing.

[Vibe effect A]
Fig. 63 is a diagram for explaining the vibration effect A. The vibration effect A in Fig. 63 is an effect in which the special symbols are changed in the same manner.

In vibration effect A, as shown in FIG. 63(A), first, a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change effect, two reserved icons 9A and one change icon 9C are displayed. That is, in this decorative pattern change effect, two reserved icons 9A are displayed, which indicates a state in which there are two reserved icons. In addition, a schematic diagram of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of FIG. 63(A), indicating the state of the effect button 63 of the gaming machine 1. In addition, the reserved icon 9A is white.

Next, as shown in Fig. 63(B), reserved display additional performance 1 is performed. In this reserved display additional performance 1, an additional game ball enters the first starting hole 20, one reserved icon 9A is added to be displayed as three, and ally character XC1 is displayed. Ally character XC1 is a character that can transform into a number of stages, and in Fig. 63(B), it is in the first stage, which is the lowest probability of winning.
In addition, in this reserved additional performance 1, since the reserved display has increased from two to three, an additional reserved vibration performance is performed. This state is shown on the right side of FIG. 63 (B). That is, in this additional reserved vibration performance, the performance button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor and emits a vibration sound of "buzz buzz". In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a "buzz buzz" sound effect. Furthermore, during the additional reserved vibration performance, the performance button 63 emits light and a predetermined part of the performance button 63 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), reserved display additional performance 2 is performed. In this reserved display additional performance 2, an additional game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and one more reserved icon 9A is added, making four icons displayed. Also, the first stage ally character XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a reserved change performance is performed. In this reserved change performance, the fourth reserved icon 9A added in the reserved display additional performance 2 is the pre-read target, and this reserved icon 9A is changed from white to red. In the example of FIG. 63(D), the reserved icon 9A that has been changed is shown by cross-hatching. In addition, in this reserved change performance, a pre-read vibration performance is also performed in which the vibration motor is vibrated to vibrate the performance button 63 when the reserved change occurs (when pre-reading occurs). In this pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor and emits a vibration sound of "buzz". In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs the sound effect of "buzz". The vibration pattern of this pre-read vibration performance is different from the vibration pattern of the additional reserved vibration performance. Furthermore, during the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 63 emits light. However, unlike the additional reserved vibration performance, a predetermined part of the performance button 63 does not rotate in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

After that, every time the number of reserved items decreases from the reserved item 4 state (the number of reserved items 9A is four) (every time the number of reserved items 9A decreases by one), a pre-reading vibration effect is performed. Note that this is not limited to this, and the pre-reading vibration effect may not be performed when the number of reserved items decreases from the reserved item 4 state (the number of reserved items 9A is four) (when the number of reserved items 9A decreases by one).

In addition, in the above vibration effect A, when the number of reserved icons 9A increases from two to three, an additional reserved vibration effect is performed, but when the number of reserved icons 9A decreases from four to three, no additional reserved vibration effect is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and when the number of reserved icons 9A decreases from four to three, an additional reserved vibration effect may be performed.

In the above vibration effect A, when the special symbol changes at the same time, an additional reserved vibration effect is performed, and then a look-ahead effect and a look-ahead vibration effect are performed, but this is not limited to this. When the special symbol changes at the same time, an additional reserved vibration effect may be performed during the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead vibration effect, or when the special symbol changes at the same time, an additional reserved vibration effect may be performed after the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead vibration effect.

In addition, in the vibration effect A, an additional pending vibration effect may be performed when the pre-reading vibration effect is performed. In this case, the vibration pattern of the vibration motor may be a vibration pattern (for example, a vibration pattern with a 3-3-7 rhythm) different from the vibration pattern of the additional pending vibration effect (buzz buzz) and the vibration pattern of the pre-reading vibration effect (bu-bu--).

[Vibe effect B]
Fig. 64 is a diagram for explaining the vibration effect B. The vibration effect B in Fig. 64 is an effect in which the special symbols are changed in the same manner.

In vibration effect B, as shown in FIG. 64(A), first, a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change effect, two reserved icons 9A and one change icon 9C are displayed. That is, in this decorative pattern change effect, two reserved icons 9A are displayed, which indicates a state in which there are two reserved icons. In addition, a schematic diagram of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of FIG. 64(A), indicating the state of the effect button 63 of the gaming machine 1. In addition, the reserved icon 9A is white.

Next, as shown in Fig. 64(B), reserved display additional performance 1 is performed. In this reserved display additional performance 1, an additional game ball enters the first starting hole 20, one reserved icon 9A is added to be displayed as three, and ally character XC1 is displayed. Ally character XC1 is a character that can transform into a plurality of stages, and in Fig. 64(B), it is in the first stage, which is the lowest probability of winning.
In addition, in this reserved additional performance 1, since the reserved display has increased from two to three, an additional reserved vibration performance is performed. This state is shown on the right side of FIG. 64 (B). That is, in this additional reserved vibration performance, the performance button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor and emits a vibration sound of "buzz buzz". In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a "buzz buzz" sound effect. Furthermore, during the additional reserved vibration performance, the performance button 63 emits light and a predetermined part of the performance button 63 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, the ally character XC1 transforms into a second-stage state different from the first-stage state, suggesting that the probability of a big win has increased. The ally character XC1 in the second stage has a higher probability of a big win than the ally character XC1 in the first stage. In addition, in this chance-up effect, a chance-up vibration effect is also performed in which the vibration motor is vibrated to vibrate the effect button 63 during the chance-up effect. In this chance-up vibration effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor and emits a vibration sound of "bubububu". In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a sound effect of "bubububu". The vibration pattern of this chance-up vibration effect is different from the vibration patterns of the additional hold vibration effect and the pre-reading vibration effect. Furthermore, during the chance-up vibration effect, the effect button 63 emits light. However, unlike the additional hold vibration effect, a specific part of the effect button 63 does not rotate in a specific direction (e.g., clockwise).

In the above vibration effect B, when the special symbol changes in the same way, an additional reserved vibration effect is performed, and then a chance up effect and a chance up vibration effect are performed, but this is not limited to this, and when the special symbol changes in the same way, an additional reserved vibration effect may be performed during the chance up effect and chance up vibration effect, or when the special symbol changes in the same way, an additional reserved vibration effect may be performed after the chance up effect and chance up vibration effect.

In addition, in the above vibration effect B, an additional hold vibration effect may be performed when the chance up vibration effect is performed. In this case, the vibration pattern of the vibration motor may be a vibration pattern (e.g., a long vibration, Boooooo) different from the vibration pattern of the above additional hold vibration effect (buzz buzz), the vibration pattern of the pre-reading vibration effect (buzz buzz), and the vibration pattern of the chance up vibration effect (bubbubuzz).

[Vibe effect C]
Fig. 65 is a diagram for explaining the vibration effect C. The vibration effect C in Fig. 65 is an effect in which the special symbols are changed in the same manner.

In vibration effect C, as shown in FIG. 65(A), first, a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern change effect, two reserved icons 9A and one change icon 9C are displayed. That is, in this decorative pattern change effect, two reserved icons 9A are displayed, which indicates a state in which there are two reserved icons. In addition, a schematic diagram of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of FIG. 65(A), indicating the state of the effect button 63 of the gaming machine 1. In addition, the reserved icon 9A is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), chance-up effect 1 is performed. In chance-up effect 1, button image XC3 is displayed. This button image XC3 is a so-called chance-up image that suggests that the likelihood of a big win has increased, and the word "Super Hot" is displayed inside the button image. In addition, button image XC3 is an image that encourages the player to operate (press) effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), chance-up effect 2 is performed. In chance-up effect 2, button image XC3 continues to be displayed. In chance-up effect 2, an additional game ball enters the first starting hole 20, one more reserved icon 9A is displayed, and an additional reserved vibration effect is performed. This is shown on the right side of FIG. 64(B). That is, in this additional reserved vibration effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor, and a vibration sound "buzz buzz" is emitted. In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs the sound effect "buzz buzz". Furthermore, during the additional reserved vibration effect, the effect button 63 emits light, and a predetermined portion of the effect button 63 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise).

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the chance-up vibration effect 3 is performed. In this chance-up effect 3, when the player who has seen the button image XC3 operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display of the button image XC3 is erased, and the ally character XC1 in the second stage appears, which is an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big win has increased. The ally character XC1 has a higher expectation of a big win than the ally character XC1 in the first stage. In addition, in this chance-up effect 3, a chance-up vibration effect is also performed in which the vibration motor is vibrated to vibrate the effect button 63 during the chance-up effect 3. In this chance-up vibration effect, the effect button 63 is vibrated by the vibration motor, and a vibration sound of "bubububu" is emitted. In this case, the speaker 67 also outputs a sound effect of "bubububu". The vibration pattern of this chance-up vibration effect is different from the vibration patterns of the additional reserve vibration effect and the pre-reading vibration effect. Furthermore, during the chance-up vibration effect, the effect button 63 emits light. However, unlike the additional hold vibration effect, a specific part of the effect button 63 does not rotate in a specific direction (e.g., clockwise).

In addition, in the above vibration effect C, if the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect occur at the same time, the vibration pattern (buzz buzz) of the additional hold vibe effect is given priority when performing the vibe effect. However, this is not limited to this, and when the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect occur at the same time, the vibration pattern (bubububu) of the chance up vibe effect may be given priority when performing the vibe effect. Also, when the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect occur at the same time, the vibration effect may be performed with a vibration pattern (e.g. bububububu) different from the vibration patterns of the additional hold vibe effect and the chance up vibe effect.

[Modification]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a vibration motor is installed in the performance button 63, but this is not limited to this and the motor may be installed inside a specified device, inside a handle, or inside an operating means other than a button (e.g., a lever).
In the above vibration effects A to C, in the additional hold vibration effect, when vibration occurs, a specific part of the effect button 63 rotates in response to the vibration, but this is not limited to this, and a specific part of the effect button 63 may pop out or be recessed.
The vibration pattern of the pre-reading vibration effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional pending vibration effect, but is not limited to this, and the vibration pattern of the pre-reading vibration effect may be the same as the vibration pattern of the additional pending vibration effect.
The vibration pattern of the chance up vibration effect is different from the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect, but is not limited to this, and the vibration pattern of the chance up vibration effect may be the same as the vibration pattern of the additional hold vibration effect.
During the same variation of the special symbol, the additional reserved vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, and the chance up vibration performance may be performed. In this case, the additional reserved vibration performance may be followed by the pre-reading vibration performance, the additional reserved vibration performance, the chance up vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the additional reserved vibration performance, the chance up vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the additional reserved vibration performance, the chance up vibration performance, the chance up vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the chance up vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the additional reserved vibration performance, or the chance up vibration performance, the additional reserved vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance, the chance up vibration performance, the additional reserved vibration performance, the pre-reading vibration performance.
In the above vibration effects A to C, an additional hold vibration effect is performed when the hold display changes from two to three (when the number of holds increases from two to three), but this is not limited to this, and an additional hold vibration effect may be performed when the hold display changes from three to four (when the number of holds increases from three to four), or when the hold display changes from one to two (when the number of holds increases from one to two), or when the hold display changes from zero to one (when the number of holds increases from zero to one).

[Example of effect]
In the gaming machine 1, the upper limit of the reserved number of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, and when there are four reserved symbols, even if a ball lands in the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the reserved number does not increase, and shooting a game ball with the purpose of landing in these start holes becomes a wasteful act, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, when there are four reserved symbols, a game ball landing in the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 is also called "over-entering the start hole."
In the vibration effects A to C, when the reserved icon 9A increases from two to three (when the reserved number increases from two to three), the effect button 63 is vibrated. With this configuration, it is possible to inform a player who is not concentrating on the game or a player who is playing in a noisy environment that the reserved number has increased by a predetermined number (for example, three reserved balls) or more by vibration, which suppresses over-entering the starting hole, thereby suppressing the disadvantage of the player and promoting the player's enjoyment of the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In the vibration effects A to C, a vibration motor is installed inside the effect button 63, making it possible to vibrate the effect button 63. With this configuration, since the vibration motor is installed on the effect button 63, which is relatively often touched by the player, the player can easily sense the vibration when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number (e.g., reserved 3) or more, and the ball is prevented from going over the starting hole, and thus the disadvantage to the player is prevented, and the player can enjoy the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1, the player can select whether or not to set the additional reserved vibration effect during the variation of the special symbol. With this configuration, the player can set whether or not to perform the additional reserved vibration effect even during the variation of the special symbol, which increases the freedom of the game and increases the interest of the game.
In the vibration performance A, after the reserved icon 9A is added and the additional reserved vibration performance is performed in the same change, the pre-reading vibration performance is performed when the pre-reading performance (reserved change performance) is performed. According to this configuration, the pre-reading vibration performance is performed during the pre-reading performance after the reserved vibration performance in the same change, so that when the player experiences the reserved vibration performance next after experiencing these performances, the player can be given a sense of expectation of a big win in the reserved vibration performance (because the pre-reading performance is originally a performance that gives a sense of expectation of a big win), and the interest of the reserved vibration performance can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above vibration effects B and C, the chance up vibration effect is performed when the chance up effect is being performed after the reserved icon 9A is added and the additional reserved vibration effect is performed in the same change. According to this configuration, the chance up vibration effect is performed during the chance up effect after the reserved vibration effect in the same change, so that when the player experiences the reserved vibration effect next time after experiencing these effects, the player can be given a sense of expectation of a big win in the reserved vibration effect (since the chance up effect is originally a performance that gives a sense of expectation of a big win), and the interest in the reserved vibration effect can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the above vibration effects A to C, the additional reserved vibration effect is performed when the number of reserved icons 9A changes from two to three (when the number of reserved balls changes from two to three). With this configuration, when the launch is stopped immediately due to the additional reserved vibration effect, even if the game ball remaining in the game board enters the first starting hole 20, it is still possible to reserve one more ball even if the number of reserved balls becomes three, so that it is possible to suppress over-entering the starting hole. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player, to encourage the player to enjoy the game, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
and a vibration means for vibrating,
A first effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
A second effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
The first effect is an effect in which a predetermined number of reserved displays are displayed on the display means,
The second performance is a performance in which a first vibration performance is performed by vibrating the vibration means,
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first performance and the second performance are performed, and when the hold display increases from a first number to a second number in the first performance, the second performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
The vibration means is disposed on the operating means and is capable of vibrating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
A setting means is provided for setting either one of a first setting for performing the combination performance during the variation of the special symbols after the variation and a second setting for not performing the combination performance during the variation of the special symbols after the variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A third effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
A fourth effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
The third performance is a performance in which, in the display means, when there is the reserved display, a pre-reading performance is performed on a target reserved corresponding to a specific reserved display among the reserved displays,
The fourth performance is a vibration performance different from the first vibration performance, and is a performance in which a second vibration performance in which the vibration means vibrates is performed,
The combination effect may include the third effect and the fourth effect,
In the combination performance, after the first performance and the second performance are performed, the third performance and the fourth performance are performed, and the fourth performance is performed when the look-ahead performance in the third performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-3 or aspect XC-4,
A fifth effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
A sixth effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
The fifth effect is an effect of performing a chance-up effect on the display means, the chance-up effect indicating that a jackpot expectation rate is increasing,
The sixth performance is a third vibration performance that is different from the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance and in which the vibration means vibrates,
The combination effect may include the fifth effect and the sixth effect,
In the combination performance, after the first performance and the second performance are performed, the fifth performance and the sixth performance are performed, and the sixth performance is performed when the chance up performance in the fifth performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-4 or aspect XC-5,
The first number is two less than the upper limit of the predetermined number of the hold indications,
The second number is one less than the upper limit of the predetermined number of the hold display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, using Figures 66 to 68, we will explain the icon change effects A to C that cover multiple changes. In Figures 66 to 68, for example, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 that are arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This multiple-stage variable icon change presentation can be executed across multiple variable presentations (variable displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable presentation start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a multiple-stage variable icon change presentation is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The various background images used in the multiple icon change effects include, for example, city images, forest images, ocean images, ocean bottom images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or videos.

Here, we will first explain the multiple-change variable icon change presentation A, then explain the multiple-change variable icon change presentation B, and finally explain the multiple-change variable icon change presentation C.

[Multiple changes in icon change performance A]
The variable icon change performance A over a plurality of changes will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon change performance A over a plurality of changes. The variable icon change performance A over a plurality of changes is performed over a plurality of change performances (variation display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed toward the bottom, changing at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped, they move slowly up and down in small movements.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, as described above, the frozen decorative pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) upwards in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, after the frozen display of the decorative pattern is released and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), the decorative pattern moves downwards from a low speed, gradually increasing its speed as it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This start mode of the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is called the "normal change start mode".

In contrast, when the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, unlike the normal change start mode, the stopped decorative pattern rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the front (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the rear), as if a coin were spinning, then rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the rear (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the front) so that the decorative pattern faces forward again, and when it rotates further slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the rear (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the front), then rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the front (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the rear) so that the decorative pattern faces forward again. After this series of rotations is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice) (in other words, after the decorative pattern is released from its static display and is displayed as if it is about to move), the decorative pattern moves downwards at a slow speed, gradually increasing its speed as it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This start mode of the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is called the "specific change start mode."

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad or the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. Note that the white spherical variable icon 9C and the two white spherical hold icons 9A have the same shape and size.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to understand intuitively and are difficult to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. These numbers are placed on the foreground of the display screen 7a, and other images are placed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, so that their visibility is not hindered by other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed and their visibility is not hindered by other images, even when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) has ended, so that they can always be seen even during the changing icon change performance A that spans multiple changes.

Here, briefly, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The colors of the yellow (gold) star icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon are all bright colors.

The smiling sphere icon is further set to have a high probability of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). All of these colors are bright colors. Other icons include the character A icon and the character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The character A icon with a white aura and the character B icon with a white aura have the same probability of winning as the white sphere icon, but the character A icon and the character B icon have a high probability of winning in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (high probability of winning). All of these colors are bright colors.

In FIG. 66(A), for example, a city image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 66(B), during the decorative pattern change performance (change display), a game ball enters the first start hole 20, and a change icon change performance A spanning multiple changes is started by a look-ahead performance. As a result of the game ball entering the first start hole 20, a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical reserve icons 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning. The white spherical change icon 9C and the three white spherical reserve icons 9A have the same shape and size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "1", so that the result is a confirmed miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. Note that although the variable icon change performance A, which spans multiple changes, has already started due to the pre-reading performance, up until this point, no pending changes (changes to other colors, changes to other types) have occurred to the three white spherical pending icons 9A, and no changes (changes to other colors, changes to other types) have occurred to the variable icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in the normal variable start mode. At this time, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad. This results in the existence of two white spherical reserved icons 9A, which have the lowest expected probability of winning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "4", which indicates a confirmed miss and the variable performance (variable display) ends, but the white spherical variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a and remains displayed. Just before the variable performance (variable display) ends, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad. This results in three white spherical reserve icons 9A, which have the lowest expected probability of winning.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is after the variable icon change performance A involving multiple changes has started due to the pre-reading performance, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are before the variable icon change performance A involving multiple changes has started due to the pre-reading performance.

The predictive performance has already started a multiple-change variable icon change performance A, and the middle decorative pattern is fixed (stopped) at a specific pattern (here, the odd number "3"), so that the variable icon 9C, which would normally disappear from the display screen 7a when the variable performance (variable display) ends, remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad starts to move to the variable display position 9Cd, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in the normal variable start mode. The shape of this reserved icon 9A is the same as the shape of the variable icon 9C (i.e., the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The reserved icon 9A that has started to move moves to the front side of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad. As a result, there are two white spherical reserved icons 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning.

The reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad is after the variable icon change performance A involving multiple changes has started due to the pre-reading performance, whereas the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is before the variable icon change performance A involving multiple changes has started due to the pre-reading performance.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap (i.e. just before the hold icon 9A completely covers the variable icon 9C), the entire display screen 7a turns into a darkened image, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd can be seen as they change from the color before the darkening to a dimmer color after the darkening.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the start of the multiple icon change performance A through the look-ahead performance, and can be seen as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A, changing from the color before the blackout to a dim color after the blackout, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is before the start of the multiple icon change performance A through the look-ahead performance, and can be seen as a bright white spherical hold icon 9A, with no change in brightness at all before and after the blackout.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(H), when a bright blue message image MG saying "Change!" is displayed large in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a bright blue flash of light, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears (is displayed) at the variable display position 9Cd, and when this flash weakens, the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C, which has become the bright blue color (specific color) of this flash, is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having a bright blue aura, and the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C is displayed in a display mode in which a spotlight is shone on it. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after the blackout to the color (bright color) before the blackout. The area SPR where the spotlight is shone is displayed in a display mode that gradually expands in a concentric circle shape with the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C as the center. In the spotlighted area SPR, the image before the blackout (background image, variable display position 9Cd), i.e. the image (background image, variable display position 9Cd) that has returned from the dim color after the blackout to the color before the blackout (bright color), can be easily seen, and furthermore, the central decorative pattern 8C during the changing performance (variable display) can also be seen in front of the background image.

When the spotlighted area SPR becomes the largest, it overlaps with the second hold display position 9Ad and a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only the second hold display position 9Ad and a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR are in the image (color) before being darkened, and this part (the image (color) before being darkened only in part) can be easily seen. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR remains a bright white spherical hold icon 9A as usual. Therefore, the bright white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad can be easily seen continuously. The boundary area between the inside and outside of the spotlighted area SPR is an area where a gradation process is applied in which the color gradually becomes darker from the inside to the outside.

Then, with the spotlight still on, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright, and when it all returns to the image it was before going dark, the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "8", so that the display is confirmed and a miss occurs, and the variable performance (variable display) ends, but the blue spherical variable icon 9C remains displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change performance A has started due to the pre-reading performance, as described above, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is before the multiple icon change performance A has started due to the pre-reading performance, as described above.

The predictive performance has already started a multiple-change variable icon change performance A, and the central decorative pattern is fixed (stopped) at a specific pattern (here, the odd number "7"), so that the variable icon 9C, which would normally disappear from the display screen 7a when the variable performance (variable display) ends, remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(J), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad starts to move to the variable display position 9Cd, a specific variable start mode starts the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern, unlike the normal variable start mode. The shape of this reserved icon 9A has the same shape as the variable icon 9C (i.e., the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The reserved icon 9A that has started to move moves to the front side of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad. As a result, there is one white spherical reserved icon 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning.

The pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is after the predictive performance has started, resulting in a multiple-change icon change performance A.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap (i.e. just before the hold icon 9A completely covers the variable icon 9C), as shown in FIG. 66 (K), the entire display screen 7a turns into a darkened image, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd can be seen as they change from the color before the darkening to a dimmer color after the darkening.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the one displayed after the multiple icon change performance A has begun due to the pre-reading performance, and can be seen as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A that changes from the color before the blackout to a dim color after the blackout.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(L), when a bright red message image MG saying "Change!" is displayed large in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a bright red flash of light, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears (is displayed) at the variable display position 9Cd, and when this flash weakens, the bright red spherical variable icon 9C, which has become the bright red color (specific color) of this flash, is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having a bright red aura, and the bright red spherical variable icon 9C is displayed in a display mode in which a spotlight is shone on it. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after the blackout to the color (bright color) before the blackout. The area SPR where the spotlight is shone is displayed in a display mode that gradually expands in a concentric shape with the bright red spherical variable icon 9C as the center. In the spotlighted area SPR, the image before the blackout (background image, variable display position 9Cd), i.e. the image (background image, variable display position 9Cd) that has returned from the dim color after the blackout to the color before the blackout (bright color), can be easily seen, and furthermore, the central decorative pattern 8C during the changing performance (variable display) can also be seen in front of the background image.

Furthermore, when the spotlighted area SPR becomes the largest, it overlaps with a part of the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR shows the image (color) before it was darkened, and this part (the image (color) before it was darkened only in part) can be easily seen. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR changes from a dim white spherical hold icon 9A after the darkening to a bright white spherical hold icon 9A before the darkening, and this bright white spherical hold icon 9A can be easily seen. The boundary area between the inside and outside of the spotlighted area SPR is an area that has been subjected to a gradation process in which the color gradually becomes darker from the inside to the outside.

Then, with the spotlight still on, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright, and when it all returns to the image it was before going dark, the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(M), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change). The formation of a reach ends the changing icon change performance A, which spans multiple changes.

Here, a reach has been reached, but if the reach is not reached and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed as stopped, the display shows that it is confirmed and a miss, and the changing icon change performance A, which spans multiple changes, ends. Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the changing display position 9Cd and becomes the changing icon 9C, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) will start again in the normal change start mode.

Following FIG. 66 (M), a battle performance (not shown) begins. In the battle performance, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the friendly character wins and the enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (determined) as the same pattern (here, the number "2"), a jackpot is generated, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. In contrast, in the battle performance, when the friendly character loses and the enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (determined) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match the same pattern (here, the number "2"), resulting in a miss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern will start again in the normal change start mode.

In this way, while the change icon 9C is normally used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) during the change performance (when the change display is in progress), in the change icon change performance A that spans multiple changes, it is used as a notice that informs the start of the performance that is about to begin across multiple changes.

In addition, in the change icon change performance A over multiple changes, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the change in FIG. 66(E), the next change starts in the normal change start mode in FIG. 66(F), and the change icon 9C changes in FIG. 66(H), but no reach is formed. On the other hand, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7" in the change in FIG. 66(I), the next change starts in the specific change start mode in FIG. 66(J), the change icon 9C changes in FIG. 66(L), and a reach is formed in FIG. 66(K). In other words, in the change icon change performance A over multiple changes, when the next change starts in the normal change start mode, it is possible to suggest a change in the change icon 9C, and when the next change starts in the specific change start mode, it is possible to suggest a change in the change icon 9C and a reach is formed.

[Multiple changes in icon change performance B]
Next, the variable icon change performance B over a plurality of changes will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon change performance B over a plurality of changes. The variable icon change performance B over a plurality of changes is performed over a plurality of change performances (variation display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed toward the bottom, changing at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped, they move slowly up and down in small movements.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, as described above, the frozen decorative pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) upwards in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, after the frozen display of the decorative pattern is released and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), the decorative pattern moves downwards from a low speed, gradually increasing its speed as it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This start mode of the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is called the "normal change start mode".

In contrast, when the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, unlike the normal change start mode, the stopped decorative pattern rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the front (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the rear), as if a coin were spinning, then rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the rear (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the front) so that the decorative pattern faces forward again, and when it rotates further slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the rear (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the front), then rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the front (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the rear) so that the decorative pattern faces forward again. After this series of rotations is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice) (in other words, after the decorative pattern is released from its static display and is displayed as if it is about to move), the decorative pattern moves downwards at a slow speed, gradually increasing its speed as it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This start mode of the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is called the "specific change start mode."

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. Note that the white spherical variable icon 9C and the two white spherical hold icons have the same shape and size.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to understand intuitively and are difficult to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. These numbers are placed on the foreground of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, so that their visibility is not hindered by other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed and their visibility is not hindered by other images, even when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) has ended, so that they can always be seen even during the changing icon change performance B that spans multiple changes.

Here, briefly, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The colors of the yellow (gold) star icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon are all bright colors.

The smiling sphere icon is further set to have a high probability of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). All of these colors are bright colors. Other icons include the character A icon and the character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The character A icon with a white aura and the character B icon with a white aura have the same probability of winning as the white sphere icon, but the character A icon and the character B icon have a high probability of winning in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (high probability of winning). All of these colors are bright colors.

In FIG. 67(A), for example, a city image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(B), during the decorative pattern change performance (change display), a game ball enters the first start hole 20, and a change icon change performance B spanning multiple changes is started by a look-ahead performance. As a result of the game ball entering the first start hole 20, a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical reserve icons 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning. The white spherical change icon 9C and the three white spherical reserve icons 9A have the same shape and size.

When the predictive display starts a multiple-change variable icon change display B, the display mode in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A jumps upward in sequence is repeated from the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad, which is located at the farthest position from the variable display position 9Cd, to the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, the display mode in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A jumps upward in sequence is propagated from the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad to the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, so that the three reserved icons 9A are displayed in a wavy display mode (wave display mode). At this time, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd is different from the three pending icons 9A in that it does not jump upwards, but remains placed at the variable display position 9Cd.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "1", so that the result is a confirmed miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the changing performance (changing display) ends. Note that, because the changing icon change performance B, which spans multiple changes, has already started due to the look-ahead performance, the three reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, the variable icon 9C changes to a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards. In other words, even when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption).

In addition, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upward moves to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upward to become the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in the normal variable start mode. At this time, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upward moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upward, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upward moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upward. In other words, even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption), and even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). This results in the existence of two white spherical reserved icons 9A, which have the lowest probability of winning.

In this way, when the three white spherical hold icons 9A move (shift) to the right, they continuously (without interruption) jump up and down in a hopping (jumping) display pattern, resulting in a continuous rippling display pattern (wave display pattern).

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", and then before the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "4" (or just before the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "4"), the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards suddenly changes from a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards to a display mode of being placed on the variable display position 9Cd. In other words, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd stops hopping (jumping) upwards and comes to a state of being stopped on the variable display position 9Cd. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "3", and when it is confirmed and misses, the variable performance (variable display) ends, but the white spherical variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a and remains displayed. Just before the end of the variable performance (variable display), a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, causing a white spherical reserved icon 9A to be displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad. As a result, there are now three white spherical reserved icons 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning. The reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad also jumps upwards, and the three reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is after the variable icon change performance B involving multiple changes has started due to the pre-reading performance, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are before the variable icon change performance B involving multiple changes has started due to the pre-reading performance.

The predictive performance has already started a multiple-change variable icon change performance B, and the middle decorative pattern is fixed (stopped) at a specific pattern (here, the odd number "3"), so that the variable icon 9C, which would normally disappear from the display screen 7a when the variable performance (variable display) ends, remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), when the reserved icon 9A, which was displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, starts to move to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in the normal variable start mode. The shape of this reserved icon 9A has the same shape as the variable icon 9C (i.e., the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The reserved icon 9A, which starts to move while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, moves so that it is in front of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd.

At this time, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the first hold display position 9Ad while continuing its display mode of hopping (jumping) in the upward direction, and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the second hold display position 9Ad while continuing its display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards. In other words, even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption), and even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). As a result, there are two white spherical reserved icons 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning, and the two reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change performance B has started due to the pre-reading performance, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is before the multiple icon change performance B has started due to the pre-reading performance.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap (i.e. just before the hold icon 9A completely covers the variable icon 9C), the entire display screen 7a turns into a darkened image, as shown in FIG. 67(G), and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd can be seen as they change from the color before the darkening to a dimmer color after the darkening.

The reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad is after the start of the multiple-stage icon change performance B by the look-ahead performance, and can be seen as a dim white spherical reserved icon 9A, changing from the color before the blackout to a dim color after the blackout, whereas the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is before the multiple-stage icon change performance B by the look-ahead performance is started, and can be seen as a bright white spherical reserved icon 9A, with no change in brightness at all before and after the blackout. Note that even at this point, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad continue to be displayed in a hopping (jumping) manner upwards, and the two reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display manner).

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(H), when a bright blue message image MG saying "Change!" is displayed large in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a bright blue flash of light, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears (is displayed) at the variable display position 9Cd, and when this flash weakens, the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C, which has become the bright blue color (specific color) of this flash, is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having a bright blue aura, and the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C is displayed in a display mode in which a spotlight is shone on it. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after the blackout to the color (bright color) before the blackout. The area SPR where the spotlight is shone is displayed in a display mode that gradually expands in a concentric circle shape with the bright blue spherical variable icon 9C as the center. In the spotlighted area SPR, the image before the blackout (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image (background image, variable display position 9Cd) that has returned from the dim color after the blackout to the color before the blackout (bright color), can be easily seen, and further, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable performance (variable display) can also be seen in front of the background image. At this point, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad continue to jump (jump) upwards, and the two reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

When the spotlighted area SPR becomes the largest, it overlaps with the second hold display position 9Ad and a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only the second hold display position 9Ad and a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR are in the image (color) before being darkened, and this part (the image (color) before being darkened only in part) can be easily seen. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR remains a bright white spherical hold icon 9A as usual. Therefore, the bright white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad can be easily seen continuously. The boundary area between the inside and outside of the spotlighted area SPR is an area where a gradation process is applied in which the color gradually becomes darker from the inside to the outside.

Then, with the spotlight still on, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright, and when it all returns to the image it was before going dark, the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(I), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "8", so that the display is confirmed and a miss occurs, and the variable performance (variable display) ends, but the blue spherical variable icon 9C remains displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change performance B has started due to the pre-reading performance, as described above, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is before the multiple icon change performance B has started due to the pre-reading performance, as described above.

The predictive display has already started a multiple-change variable icon change display B, and the central decorative pattern is fixed (stopped) at a specific pattern (here, the odd number "7"), so that the variable icon 9C, which would normally disappear from the display screen 7a when the variable display (variable display) ends, remains displayed. Also, even at this point, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad continue to jump upwards, and the two hold icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(J), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards starts moving to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, a decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in a specific variable start mode, unlike the normal variable start mode. The shape of this reserved icon 9A has the same shape as the variable icon 9C (i.e., the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are spherical icons). The reserved icon 9A that has started moving while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the front side of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards. In other words, even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). This results in the existence of one white spherical reserved icon 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change performance B has started due to the pre-reading performance.

Then, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap (i.e., just before the hold icon 9A completely covers the variable icon 9C), as shown in FIG. 67(K), the entire display screen 7a goes dark, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd can be seen by changing from the color before the darkening to the dim color after the darkening. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as a display mode that hops (jumps) upwards suddenly changes from the display mode that hops (jumps) upwards to a display mode that is placed at the first hold display position 9A. In other words, the floating icon 9C displayed at the first hold display position 9A stops hopping (jumping) upwards and comes to a stop above the first hold display position 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the one displayed after the multiple icon change performance B has begun due to the pre-reading performance, and can be seen as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A that changes from the color before the blackout to a dim color after the blackout.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(L), when a bright red message image MG saying "Change!" is displayed large in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a bright red flash of light, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears (is displayed) at the variable display position 9Cd, and when this flash weakens, the bright red spherical variable icon 9C, which has become the bright red color (specific color) of this flash, is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having a bright red aura, and the bright red spherical variable icon 9C is displayed in a display mode in which a spotlight is shone on it. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after the blackout to the color (bright color) before the blackout. The area SPR where the spotlight is shone is displayed in a display mode that gradually expands in a concentric circle shape with the bright red spherical variable icon 9C as the center. In the spotlighted area SPR, the image before the blackout (background image, variable display position 9Cd), i.e. the image (background image, variable display position 9Cd) that has returned from the dim color after the blackout to the color before the blackout (bright color), can be easily seen, and furthermore, the central decorative pattern 8C during the changing performance (variable display) can also be seen in front of the background image.

Furthermore, when the spotlighted area SPR becomes the largest, it overlaps with a part of the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR shows the image (color) before it was darkened, and this part (the image (color) before it was darkened only in part) can be easily seen. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR changes from a dim white spherical hold icon 9A after the darkening to a bright white spherical hold icon 9A before the darkening, and this bright white spherical hold icon 9A can be easily seen. The boundary area between the inside and outside of the spotlighted area SPR is an area that has been subjected to a gradation process in which the color gradually becomes darker from the inside to the outside.

After that, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright with the spotlight still on it, and when the image returns to the one before it went dark, the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(M), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change). The formation of a reach ends the changing icon change performance B, which spans multiple changes.

Here, a reach has been reached, but if the reach is not reached and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed as stopped, the display shows that it is confirmed and a miss, and the variable icon change presentation B, which spans multiple changes, ends. Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern change presentation (variable display) will begin again in the normal change start mode.

Following FIG. 67(M), a battle performance (not shown) begins. In the battle performance, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the friendly character wins and the enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (determined) as the same pattern (here, the number "2"), a jackpot is generated, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. In contrast, in the battle performance, when the friendly character loses and the enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (determined) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match the same pattern (here, the number "2"), resulting in a miss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern will start again in the normal change start mode.

In this way, while the change icon 9C is normally used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) during the change performance (when the change display is in progress), in the change icon change performance B, which spans multiple changes, it is used as a notice that informs the start of the performance that is about to begin, spanning multiple changes.

In addition, in the multiple-change icon change performance B, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" in the change in FIG. 67(E), the next change starts in the normal change start mode in FIG. 67(F), and the change of the change icon 9C occurs in FIG. 67(H), but no reach is formed. On the other hand, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7" in the change in FIG. 67(I), the next change starts in the specific change start mode in FIG. 67(J), the change of the change icon 9C occurs in FIG. 67(L), and further, a reach is formed in FIG. 67(K). In other words, in the multiple-change icon change performance B, when the next change starts in the normal change start mode, it is possible to suggest a change in the change icon 9C, and when the next change starts in the specific change start mode, it is possible to suggest a change in the change icon 9C and a reach is formed.

[Multiple changes in icon change performance C]
Next, the variable icon change performance C over a plurality of changes will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon change performance C over a plurality of changes. The variable icon change performance C over a plurality of changes is performed over a plurality of change performances (variation display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed toward the bottom, changing at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, as described above, the frozen decorative pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) upwards in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, after the frozen display of the decorative pattern is released and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), the decorative pattern moves downwards from a low speed, gradually increasing its speed as it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This start mode of the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is called the "normal change start mode".

In contrast, when the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, unlike the normal change start mode, the stopped decorative pattern rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the front (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the rear), as if a coin were spinning, then rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the rear (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the front) so that the decorative pattern faces forward again, and when it rotates further slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the rear (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the front), then rotates slightly from the right side of the decorative pattern towards the front (from the left side of the decorative pattern towards the rear) so that the decorative pattern faces forward again. After this series of rotations is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice) (in other words, after the decorative pattern is released from its static display and is displayed as if it is about to move), the decorative pattern moves downwards at a slow speed, gradually increasing its speed as it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This start mode of the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is called the "specific change start mode."

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. Note that the white spherical variable icon 9C and the two white spherical hold icons have the same shape and size.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are placed on the foreground of the display screen 7a, and other images are placed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, so that their visibility is not hindered by other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed and their visibility is not hindered by other images, even when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) has ended, so that they can always be seen even in the changing icon change performance C that spans multiple changes.

Here, briefly, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The colors of the yellow (gold) star icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon are all bright colors.

The smiling sphere icon is further set to have a high probability of winning in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). All of these colors are bright colors. Other icons include the character A icon and the character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The character A icon with a white aura and the character B icon with a white aura have the same probability of winning as the white sphere icon, but the character A icon and the character B icon have a high probability of winning in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (high probability of winning). All of these colors are bright colors.

In FIG. 68(A), for example, a city image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins. Then, as shown in FIG. 68(B), during the decorative pattern change performance (change display), a game ball enters the first start hole 20, and a change icon change performance C spanning multiple changes is started by a look-ahead performance. As a result of the game ball entering the first start hole 20, a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad. As a result, there are three white spherical reserve icons 9A with the lowest expected probability of winning. The white spherical change icon 9C and the three white spherical reserve icons 9A have the same shape and size.

When the variable icon change performance C, which spans multiple changes, is started by the pre-reading performance, the display mode in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A jumps upward in sequence is repeated from the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad, which is located at the farthest position from the variable display position 9Cd, to the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, the display mode in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A jumps upward in sequence is propagated from the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad to the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, resulting in a display mode in which the three reserved icons 9A wave. At this time, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd is different from the three pending icons 9A in that it does not jump upwards, but remains placed at the variable display position 9Cd.

In this embodiment, each time the reserved icon 9A hops upwards, the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes repeatedly in the following order: white spherical reserved icon 9A → reserved icon 9A of character A with a white aura → reserved icon 9A of character B with a white aura → white spherical reserved icon 9A → ....

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "1", so that the result is a confirmed miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the changing performance (changing display) ends. Note that, because the changing icon change performance C, which spans multiple changes, has already started due to the look-ahead performance, the three reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

Next, as shown in Fig. 68(D), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, the variable icon 9C becomes a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards. In other words, even when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). Of course, in this embodiment, each time the variable icon 9C hops (jumps) upwards at the variable display position 9Cd, the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes repeatedly in the following order: white spherical reserved icon 9A → reserved icon 9A of character A with a white aura → reserved icon 9A of character B with a white aura → white spherical reserved icon 9A → ...

In addition, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upward moves to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upward to become the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in the normal variable start mode. At this time, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upward moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upward, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upward moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upward. In other words, even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption), and even if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). This results in the existence of two white spherical reserved icons 9A, which have the lowest probability of winning.

In this way, when the three hold icons 9A move (shift move) to the right, they are displayed in a continuous (uninterrupted) manner as if they are hopping (jumping) upwards, so that a rippling display pattern (wave display pattern) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", and then before the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "4" (or just before the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "4"), the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards suddenly changes from a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards to a display mode of being placed at the variable display position 9Cd, and becomes the variable icon 9C of character A with a white aura emanating from it. In other words, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd stops hopping (jumping) upwards and comes to a stop above the variable display position 9Cd.

When the variable icon 9C suddenly changes from a display mode in which it is hopping (jumping) upwards to a display mode in which it is placed at the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C of character A emitting a white aura, in conjunction with this, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad are fixed to the reserved icon 9A of character A emitting a white aura, but continue to be displayed in a hopping (jumping) upwards manner.

After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at the number "3" and is confirmed, resulting in a miss. The variable performance (variable display) ends, but the variable icon 9C of character A with a white aura does not disappear from the display screen 7a and remains displayed. Just before the variable performance (variable display) ends, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, causing a white spherical reserve icon 9A to be displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad. This results in three reserve icons 9A being present.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad also jumps upwards, and the three hold icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode). However, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is after the start of the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes due to the look-ahead performance, and therefore, unlike the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which are before the start of the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes due to the look-ahead performance, even if it jumps upwards, the shape of the hold icon 9A does not change and remains as a white spherical hold icon 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad is after the variable icon change performance C involving multiple changes has started due to the look-ahead performance, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad are before the variable icon change performance C involving multiple changes has started due to the look-ahead performance.

The predictive performance has already started a multiple-change variable icon change performance C, and the central decorative pattern is fixed (stopped) at a specific pattern (here, the odd number "3"), so that the variable icon 9C, which would normally disappear from the display screen 7a when the variable performance (variable display) ends, remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), when the reserved icon 9A, which was displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, starts to move to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in the normal variable start mode. The shape of this reserved icon 9A has the same shape as the variable icon 9C (i.e., the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are the icons of character A). The reserved icon 9A, which starts to move while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, moves so that it is in front of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd.

At this time, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the first hold display position 9Ad while continuing its display mode of hopping (jumping) in the upward direction, and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the second hold display position 9Ad while continuing its display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards. In other words, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption), and even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). As a result, there are two hold icons 9A, and the two hold icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change display C has started due to the pre-reading performance, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is before the multiple icon change display C has started due to the pre-reading performance.

After that, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap (i.e. just before the hold icon 9A completely covers the variable icon 9C), the entire display screen 7a turns into a darkened image, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd can be seen as they change from the color before the darkening to a dimmer color after the darkening.

The reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad is after the start of the multiple-stage variable icon change performance C by the look-ahead performance, and can be seen as a dim white spherical reserved icon 9A that changes from the color before the blackout to a dim color after the blackout, whereas the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is before the start of the multiple-stage variable icon change performance C by the look-ahead performance, and can be seen as the reserved icon 9A of character A with a bright white aura without any change in brightness before and after the blackout. Note that even at this point, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad continue to be displayed in a hopping (jumping) manner upwards, and the two reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display manner).

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(H), when a bright blue message image MG saying "Change!" is displayed large in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a bright blue flash of light, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears (is displayed) at the variable display position 9Cd, and when this flash weakens, the variable icon 9C of character A, which is emitting a bright blue aura in the bright blue color (specific color) of this flash, is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having a bright blue aura, and the variable icon 9C of character A, which is emitting a bright blue aura, is displayed in a display mode in which a spotlight is shone on it. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after the blackout to the color (bright color) before the blackout. The area SPR where the spotlight is shone is displayed in a display mode that gradually expands in a concentric circle shape with the variable icon 9C of character A, which is emitting a bright blue aura, as the center. In the spotlighted area SPR, the image before the blackout (background image, variable display position 9Cd), that is, the image (background image, variable display position 9Cd) that has returned from the dim color after the blackout to the color before the blackout (bright color), can be easily seen, and further, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable performance (variable display) can also be seen in front of the background image. At this point, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad continue to jump (jump) upwards, and the two reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

When the spotlighted area SPR becomes the largest, it overlaps with the second hold display position 9Ad and a part of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR is the image (color) before it is darkened, and this part (the image (color) before only a part is darkened) can be easily seen. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR remains the hold icon 9A of character A with a bright white aura. Therefore, the hold icon 9A of character A with a bright white aura displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad can be easily seen. The boundary area between the inside and outside of the spotlighted area SPR is an area where a gradation process is applied in which the color gradually becomes darker from the inside to the outside.

Then, with the spotlight still on, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright, and when it all returns to the image it was before going dark, the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "8", which indicates a confirmed miss and the variable performance (variable display) ends, but the variable icon 9C of character A with a blue aura emitting from it remains displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change display C has started due to the look-ahead performance, as described above, whereas the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is before the multiple icon change display C has started due to the look-ahead performance, as described above.

The predictive display has already started a multiple-change variable icon change display C, and the central decorative pattern is fixed (stopped) at a specific pattern (here, the odd number "7"), so that the variable icon 9C, which would normally disappear from the display screen 7a when the variable display (variable display) ends, remains displayed. Also, even at this point, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad continue to jump upwards, and the two reserved icons 9A continue to be displayed in a wavy manner (wave display mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(J), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards starts moving to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards, a decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) starts in a specific variable start mode, unlike the normal variable start mode. The shape of this reserved icon 9A has the same shape as the variable icon 9C (i.e., the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are the icons of character A). The reserved icon 9A that has started moving while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the front side of the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in a display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards moves to the first hold display position 9Ad while continuing the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards. In other words, even if the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the display mode of hopping (jumping) upwards continues (without interruption). This results in one hold icon 9A being present.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is after the multiple icon change display C has started due to the pre-reading display.

Then, just before the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely overlap (i.e., just before the hold icon 9A completely covers the variable icon 9C), as shown in FIG. 68(K), the entire display screen 7a goes dark, and the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C completely disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable display position 9Cd can be seen by changing from the color before the darkening to the dim color after the darkening. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as a display mode that hops (jumps) upwards suddenly changes from the display mode that hops (jumps) upwards to a display mode that is placed at the first hold display position 9A. In other words, the floating icon 9C displayed at the first hold display position 9A stops hopping (jumping) upwards and comes to a stop above the first hold display position 9A.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is the one displayed after the multiple icon change performance C has begun due to the look-ahead performance, and can be seen as a dim white spherical hold icon 9A, changing from the color before the blackout to a dim color after the blackout.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(L), when a bright red message image MG saying "Change!" is displayed large in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a bright red flash of light, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears (is displayed) at the variable display position 9Cd, and when this flash weakens, the variable icon 9C of character A, which is emitting a bright red aura in the bright red color (specific color) of this flash, is displayed in a display mode placed on the variable display position 9Cd together with the effect image 9Cz having a bright red aura, and the variable icon 9C of character A, which is emitting a bright red aura, is displayed in a display mode in which a spotlight is shone on it. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd also returns from the dim color after the blackout to the color (bright color) before the blackout. The area SPR where the spotlight is shone is displayed in a display mode that gradually expands in a concentric circle shape with the variable icon 9C of character A, which is emitting a bright red aura, as the center. In the spotlighted area SPR, the image before the blackout (background image, variable display position 9Cd), i.e. the image (background image, variable display position 9Cd) that has returned from the dim color after the blackout to the color before the blackout (bright color), can be easily seen, and furthermore, the central decorative pattern 8C during the changing performance (variable display) can also be seen in front of the background image.

Furthermore, when the spotlighted area SPR becomes the largest, it overlaps with a part of the second hold display position 9Ad. In this state, only a part of the second hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR shows the image (color) before it was darkened, and this part (the image (color) before it was darkened only in part) can be easily seen. The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in the spotlighted area SPR changes from a dim white spherical hold icon 9A after the darkening to a bright white spherical hold icon 9A before the darkening, and this bright white spherical hold icon 9A can be easily seen. The boundary area between the inside and outside of the spotlighted area SPR is an area that has been subjected to a gradation process in which the color gradually becomes darker from the inside to the outside.

Then, with the spotlight still on, the entire display screen 7a becomes bright, and when it all returns to the image it was before going dark, the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(M), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change). The formation of a reach ends the changing icon change performance C, which spans multiple changes.

Here, a reach has been reached, but if the reach is not reached and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed as stopped, the display shows that it is confirmed and a miss, and the changing icon change presentation C, which spans multiple changes, ends. Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the changing display position 9Cd and becomes the changing icon 9C, the decorative pattern change presentation (changing display) will begin again in the normal change start mode.

Following FIG. 68 (M), a battle performance (not shown) begins. In the battle performance, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the friendly character wins and the enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (determined) as the same pattern (here, the number "2"), a jackpot is generated, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. In contrast, in the battle performance, when the friendly character loses and the enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (determined) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match the same pattern (here, the number "2"), resulting in a miss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern will start again in the normal change start mode.

In this way, the change icon 9C is normally used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) during the change performance (when the change display is in progress), but in the change icon change performance C that spans multiple changes, it is used as a notice that informs the start of the performance that is about to begin across multiple changes.

In addition, in the change icon change performance C over multiple changes, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" in the change in FIG. 68(E), the next change starts in the normal change start mode in FIG. 68(F), and the change icon 9C changes in FIG. 68(H), but no reach is formed. On the other hand, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "7" in the change in FIG. 68(I), the next change starts in the specific change start mode in FIG. 68(J), the change icon 9C changes in FIG. 68(L), and a reach is formed in FIG. 68(K). In other words, in the change icon change performance C over multiple changes, when the next change starts in the normal change start mode, it is possible to suggest a change in the change icon 9C, and when the next change starts in the specific change start mode, it is possible to suggest a change in the change icon 9C and a reach is formed.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of changing icons over multiple periods.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the multiple-change changing icon change performance A of Figure 66, the multiple-change changing icon change performance B of Figure 67, and the multiple-change changing icon change performance C of Figure 68, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and when the pending icon 9A and the changing icon 9C are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), a first performance can be executed in which the pending icon 9A moves toward the changing icon 9C and the display mode of the changing icon 9C changes (Figures 66 (E) to (J) for the multiple-change changing icon change performance A, Figures 67 (E) to (J) for the multiple-change changing icon change performance B, and Figures 68 (E) to (J) for the multiple-change changing icon change performance C). According to this configuration, when the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the reserved icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C and the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, so that the change in the display mode can suggest the probability of a win, and the player's anticipation for the variable icon 9C whose display mode has changed can be aroused. Therefore, the novel presentation of the variable icon and the change in the display mode of the variable icon can increase the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in FIG. 66, the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in FIG. 68, the variable icon 9A can be displayed across multiple variable displays. According to this configuration, even if the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) as the change ends (even if the change ends), the variable icon 9C does not disappear and remains displayed, and when the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) as the next change starts (when the next change starts), the reserved icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C and the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes (that is, the display mode of the variable icon displayed across (across) multiple changes changes). In this way, when the change performance (change display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) as the change ends (when the change ends), the change icon 9C does not disappear as it would normally, but instead remains displayed, and the change performance (change display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) as the next change begins (the next change begins).As a result, the change icon 9C continues to be displayed across (across) multiple changes, providing the player with an unprecedented and innovative change icon performance. In addition, in the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in Fig. 66, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are both displayed with the same spherical shape, in the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in Fig. 67, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are both displayed with the same spherical shape, and in the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in Fig. 68, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are both displayed with the same character A and with the same shape. According to this configuration, when the shape of the variable icon 9C and the shape of the reserved icon 9A are the same shape, the reserved icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C that continues to be displayed without disappearing, so that when the player sees such a display mode, the player can be given the feeling that it may be some kind of hint for the performance that is about to begin, which can contribute to the player coming up with the rules of the performance by himself.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the multiple-change variable icon change performance A of FIG. 66, the multiple-change variable icon change performance B of FIG. 67, and the multiple-change variable icon change performance C of FIG. 68, when the reserved icon 9A moves toward the variable icon 9C in FIG. 66(F), (G) or FIG. 66(J), (K) of the multiple-change variable icon change performance A, the reserved icon 9A moves to the front side of the variable icon 9C and disappears just before the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C overlap, and in FIG. 66(F), (G) of the multiple-change variable icon change performance B, In Figures 7 (F), (G) and (J), (K) of Figures 67, when the hold icon 9A moves toward the floating icon 9C, the hold icon 9A moves to the front of the floating icon 9C and disappears just before the hold icon 9A and the floating icon 9C overlap, and in Figures 68 (F), (G) and (J), (K) of Figures 68 of the floating icon change performance C, which covers multiple changes, when the hold icon 9A moves toward the floating icon 9C, the hold icon 9A moves to the front of the floating icon 9C and disappears just before the hold icon 9A and the floating icon 9C overlap. According to this configuration, when the reserved icon 9A moves towards the variable icon 9C which has been displayed without disappearing up until now, the reserved icon 9A moves to the front of the variable icon 9C and both disappear just before the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C overlap. Therefore, the point at which the variable icon 9C which has been displayed without disappearing up until now suddenly disappears can be used as a timing to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the variable icon may change, thereby building up the player's anticipation for the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the multiple-change changing icon change performance A of FIG. 66, the multiple-change changing icon change performance B of FIG. 67, and the multiple-change changing icon change performance C of FIG. 68, when the pending icon 9A and the changing icon 9C both disappear just before they overlap in FIG. 66 (F) and (G) of the multiple-change changing icon change performance A, a flash of bright blue (red in FIG. 66 (J) and (K)) which is an effect image of a specific color appears, and then a bright blue spherical changing icon 9C in a specific color (a bright red spherical changing icon 9C in a specific color in FIG. 66 (J) and (K)) appears, and when the pending icon 9A and the changing icon 9C both disappear just before they overlap in FIG. 67 (F) and (G) of the multiple-change changing icon change performance B, 67(J) and (K)), a flash of bright blue (red in (J) and (K) of FIG. 67), which is an effect image of a specific color, appears, followed by a bright blue spherical variable icon 9C in the specific color (a bright red spherical variable icon 9C in the specific color in (J) and (K) of FIG. 67), and when the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C both disappear just before they overlap in FIG. 68(F) and (G) of the variable icon change performance C spanning multiple changes, a flash of bright blue (red in (J) and (K) of FIG. 68), which is an effect image of a specific color, appears, followed by a bright blue aura of character A emitting a specific color variable icon 9C (a bright red aura of character A emitting a specific color variable icon 9C in (J) and (K) of FIG. 66). According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C that has been continuously displayed without disappearing suddenly disappears, first a flash of a specific color, which is an effect image of a specific color, appears, and then the variable icon 9C with its specific color appears again. Therefore, the display mode of the variable icon 9C after the change can be predicted in advance from the specific color of the flash.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in FIG. 66, the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in FIG. 68 is executed when the middle decorative pattern 8C (specific decorative pattern) among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) that are changed (changed) in FIG. 66(E) (FIG. 66(I)) of the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes is stopped and displayed at the specific pattern, the number "3" (the number "7" in FIG. 66(G)), and the second performance in FIG. 67(E) (FIG. 67(I)) of the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes is executed when the middle decorative pattern 8C (specific decorative pattern) among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) that are changed (changed) in FIG. It is executed when the middle decorative pattern 8C (a specific decorative pattern) among the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) which are changed (displayed) in the changing performance (changing display) in Fig. 68(E) (Fig. 68(I)) of the changing icon change performance C which involves multiple changes is stopped and displayed at the specific pattern, number "3" (number "7" in Fig. 66(G)). According to this configuration, when the middle decorative pattern 8C (a specific decorative pattern) among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) is stopped and displayed, a first performance may be executed depending on whether the type of pattern is a specific pattern or not. Therefore, a variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match up to the same pattern and a reach is not formed, the first performance may be executed until the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, which can contribute to eliminating monotony in the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the changing icon change presentation over multiple periods are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in Fig. 66, the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in Fig. 67, and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in Fig. 68, these are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, these are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, these may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, these may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in FIG. 66, the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in FIG. 68, a message image MG of "Change!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a to display the message image MG on the transparent light guide plate. By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around the transparent light guide plate, the characters (e.g., "Change!") formed on the transparent light guide plate can be made to appear in bright blue or bright red by the light emitted by the full-color LEDs. Even if the characters appear in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 3]
In the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in Fig. 66, the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in Fig. 67, and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in Fig. 68, the decorative patterns are the numbers "1" to "9". The decorative patterns may be blue (slightly darker than bright blue) for the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8", red (slightly darker than bright red) for the odd numbers "1", "5", and "9", and gold (bright yellow) for the specific patterns of the numbers "3" and "7". In this way, when the specific patterns of the numbers "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed in the intermediate decorative pattern 8C, a change in the variable icon 9C occurs due to a variable icon change performance that spans multiple changes. Therefore, although the specific patterns of the numbers "3" and "7" are odd numbers, they have a gold color (bright yellow) unlike the red color of the numbers "1,""5," and "9" (a red that is slightly darker than bright red), which emphasizes the specific pattern and contributes to increasing recognition that they are specific patterns.

[Modification 4]
In the variable icon change performance A over multiple changes in FIG. 66, the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in FIG. 67, and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in FIG. 68, the decorative patterns are the numbers "1" to "9". The decorative patterns may be provided with characters corresponding to the numbers. In this case, in the normal change where the variable icon change performance over multiple changes is not started, a variable performance (variable display) using a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numbers is performed, and when the variable icon change performance over multiple changes is started, a variable performance (variable display) using a decorative pattern consisting of only numbers may be performed. In this way, the state in which the variable icon change performance over multiple changes has started can be conveyed to the player by the display mode of the decorative pattern.

[Modification 5]
In the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in FIG. 67 and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in FIG. 68, when each variable icon change performance is started, three reserved icons 9A are present, and the display mode of the reserved icons 9A jumping up in order from the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad to the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is propagated, so that the three reserved icons 9A are displayed in a wavy display mode (wave display mode). However, when four reserved icons 9A are present when each variable icon change performance is started, the display mode of the reserved icons 9A jumping up in order from the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad to the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is propagated, so that the four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a wavy display mode (wave display mode).

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in Fig. 67 and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in Fig. 68, when each variable icon change performance is started, three reserved icons 9A are present, and the display mode of the reserved icons 9A jumping up and down in order from the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad to the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is propagated, resulting in a display mode in which the three reserved icons 9A wave. However, when each variable icon change performance is started, regardless of the presence or absence of the reserved icon 9A, the display mode of each reserved display position 9Ad moving up and down in order from the fourth reserved display position 9Ad to the first reserved display position may be a display mode in which the fourth reserved display position 9Ad to the first reserved display position wave.

[Modification 7]
In the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in Fig. 67 and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in Fig. 68, when each variable icon change performance starts, three reserved icons 9A are present, and the display mode of the reserved icons 9A jumping up in sequence from the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad to the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is propagated, resulting in a display mode in which the three reserved icons 9A wave. However, the reserved icons 9A do not jump up in sequence, but each reserved display position 9Ad moves up and down in sequence from the third reserved display position 9Ad to the first reserved display position 9Ad, resulting in a display mode in which the three reserved icons 9A wave.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon change performance B over multiple changes in FIG. 67 and the variable icon change performance C over multiple changes in FIG. 68, when each variable icon change performance starts, three reserved icons 9A are present, and the display mode of the reserved icons 9A jumping upwards in sequence from the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad to the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad is propagated, so that the three reserved icons 9A are displayed in a wavy display mode (wave display mode). Furthermore, in FIG. 67(D) and FIG. 68(D), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as a display mode of jumping upwards moves to the variable display position 9Cd while continuing the display mode of jumping upwards, and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C is displayed in a display mode of jumping upwards. However, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not jump up and down, but rather each hold display position 9Ad and variable display position 9Cd moves up and down in sequence from the third hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position 9Ad and then to the variable display position 9Cd, thereby making each hold icon 9A and variable icon 9C appear to wave (a wave display mode).

[Modification 9]
The multiple-change changing icon change presentation A in Figure 66, the multiple-change changing icon change presentation B in Figure 67, and the multiple-change changing icon change presentation C in Figure 68 may not include some of the presentations described above, or other presentations may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first performance can be executed in which, in a state in which a hold icon and a variable icon are displayed on the display means, the hold icon moves toward the variable icon to change the display mode of the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-2
The gaming machine according to A6-1,
In the first performance, the variable icon can be displayed across multiple variable displays.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-3
A gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or A6-2,
In the first performance, when the hold icon moves toward the variable icon, the hold icon becomes the front side of the variable icon, and the hold icon and the variable icon disappear just before covering each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-4
The gaming machine according to A6-3,
In the first performance, when the reserved icon disappears just before it covers the variable icon, an effect image of a specific color appears, and then the variable icon that has become the specific color appears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-5
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The first performance is executed when a specific decorative pattern among a plurality of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed as a specific pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes promotion effects A to C after matching symbols using Figures 69 to 71. In Figures 69 to 71, for example, the first movable gadget 14 and the second movable gadget 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be omitted for ease of viewing.

This promotion effect after the matching of symbols can execute a promotion effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state (a high probability, high base state due to a "16RV passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V passing jackpot" shown in Figure 9) after a winning game state has occurred, before the multiple decorative symbols derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed as the same symbol and confirmed. In other words, after the occurrence of a winning game state, a specific game state (a high probability high base state due to the "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 or the "16R (actual 15R) V passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9) occurs, but the same symbol (for example, the same even number symbol) that conveys that the specific game state will not occur (a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) due to the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 occurs) is derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) to disappoint the player for a moment, and even if multiple decorative symbols are not definitely displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even number symbol) (when multiple decorative symbols are provisionally displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even number symbol)), a promotion effect can be executed that suggests the occurrence of the specific game state. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the commands include an instruction to execute a promotion effect after matching symbols, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The various background images for the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) can include, for example, normal background images such as city images, forest images, ocean images, ocean bottom images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or videos.

Here, we will first explain promotion effect A after the patterns line up, then promotion effect B after the patterns line up, and then promotion effect C after the patterns line up.

[Promotion effect A after matching symbols]
The promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned. The promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned can execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state after a winning game state occurs, before a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable performance (variable display) are displayed on the same symbol and fixedly displayed. In other words, the promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned can execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state by deriving and displaying the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol) that conveys that the specific game state will not occur, by a variable performance (variable display), to disappoint the player once, and execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state before a plurality of decorative symbols are fixedly displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol) (in a state where a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol)).

First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed toward the bottom, changing at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped, they move slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls will enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 from this point on.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to understand intuitively and are difficult to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. These numbers are placed on the foreground of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, so that their visibility is not obstructed by other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed and their visibility is not obstructed by other images, even when the decorative pattern variation performance (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variation performance (variation display) has ended, so that they can always be seen even in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the likelihood of winning at the time of the lottery that corresponds to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest likelihood of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest likelihood of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest likelihood of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest likelihood of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest likelihood of winning.

The smiling sphere icon is further set to have a high probability of winning in the following order, for example: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). Other icons include the character A icon and the character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The character A icon with a white aura and the character B icon with a white aura have the same probability of winning as the white sphere icon, but the character A icon and the character B icon have a high probability of winning in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (high probability of winning).

In FIG. 69(A), the normal background image THG1 (here, a forest image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started. At this time, it has already been determined that a specific game state (high probability high base state due to the "16R (actually 15R) V-scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 will occur after the winning game state occurs, but in order to disappoint the player for a moment, the promotion effect A after the symbols are aligned is started by deriving and displaying the same symbol (here, the same number "2") by the variation effect (variable display) to convey that the specific game state will not occur (a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) due to the "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 will occur).

The decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and then, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode in which it moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode in which it moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change performance (changing display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the battle performance starts. The background image of the battle performance is a battle-only background image THG2 that is not included in the normal background image THG1 and is exclusive to the battle performance. When the battle performance starts, the background image switches from the normal background image THG1 to the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other in the center of the display screen 7a unfolds. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same pattern, a win occurs, and then the winning game (winning performance) starts. When the win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. In contrast, in the battle performance, when the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match with the same pattern, resulting in a loss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

When the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting in the battle effect, if the ally character CRA moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character CRB moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed toward the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG urging the player to press the effect button 63, "Press!", is displayed above the button image BG. The message images MG increase the probability of winning in the order of "Press!" → "Continuously press!" → "Long press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image BG and the message image MG, and the arrow image moves back and forth repeatedly up and down, so that the arrow image can also urge the player to press the effect button 63 (press the pressing part of the effect button 63 downward). The button image BG, message image MG, and arrow image are configured to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or to disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed if the player does not press the effect button 63.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the first premium background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as the background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable role object 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed.

After that, when the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), as shown in FIG. 69 (F), a dedicated victory background image THG4 announcing the victory of the friendly character CRA is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premiere image THG3, and the enemy character CRB appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and a specific image consisting of an indicator image TB and a character CRC is displayed near the center of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a. The character CRC is displayed so that a portion of the left side of the character CRC is positioned in front so as to cover a portion of the right side of the indicator image TB.

The indicator image TB constituting the specific image visually and intuitively displays the remaining time by shortening the length of the horizontal bar image. In this embodiment, the maximum remaining time is 15 seconds. In other words, the state in which the length of the bar image is displayed at its longest (the state shown in FIG. 69 (F)) is the maximum remaining time (15 seconds), and when the specific image (indicator image TB) is displayed and the countdown starts (timekeeping starts), the length of the bar image shortens from right to left. The color of the bar image of the indicator image is bright when the remaining time is at its maximum (15 seconds) and dark when the remaining time is at its minimum (0 seconds), and the display mode is one in which the color tone changes gradually (or continuously) from the maximum (15 seconds) to the minimum (0 seconds) (gradation display mode). Note that when the color of the bar image of the indicator image changes gradually, the display mode is one in which the color tone changes darker every second (gradation display mode). In addition, when the color of the bar image of the indicator image changes continuously, the color tone changes smoothly to darker tones (gradient display mode).

The character CRC that constitutes the specific image is character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. In other words, character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as character CRC that constitutes the specific image.

After that, as shown in Figure 69 (G), the enemy character CRB becomes smaller as it moves further away in the depth direction, and flashes EXG are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion display mode. At this time, the indicator image TB and character CRC that constitute the specific image are displayed, and the display mode in which the length of the bar image of the indicator image TB gets shorter from right to left continues, and the countdown (timekeeping) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(H), a special winning background image THG5, which indicates a win as a background image, suddenly switches from the victory background image THG4 to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed temporarily stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "2"). Here, after a winning game state occurs, a high probability high base state is supposed to occur due to the specific game state "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, but the same even number "2" is intentionally derived and displayed by a variable presentation (variable display) to indicate that the specific game state will not occur, disappointing the player for a moment.

At this time, the indicator image TB and the character CRC that constitute the specific image are displayed, and the display mode in which the length of the bar image of the indicator image TB shortens from right to left continues, and the countdown (timekeeping) continues. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed as a confirmed display, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 occurs. When the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is confirmed, after the winning game (winning performance), the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), and the high probability low base state (latent probability change state) may be entered. In other words, the game state after the winning game (winning performance) may be a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) instead of the high probability high base state that is the specific game state, in which the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "2") until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds) as indicated by the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image. Of course, the character CRC constituting the specific image is also displayed.

Based on the fact that the remaining time has become the minimum (zero seconds) according to the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image (in other words, when the remaining time has become the minimum (zero seconds) according to the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image and a predetermined waiting period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed in order to tease the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 69 (J), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 that notifies the player of the confirmed promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the winning background image THG5, the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that were displayed as temporary stops also disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the second movable role object 15 advances (moves) again from a state in which it is stationary at a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (e.g., about 5 seconds).

When a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable device 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), as shown in FIG. 69(K), the background image is suddenly switched from the promotion background image THG6 to the second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7"), which has a different seven colors from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and the promotion performance A after the pattern alignment ends. Note that when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), the "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is a specific game state, occurs. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by making it a different image from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

When the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the change.

In addition, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed and the winning game (winning performance) starts and ends, the game state after the winning game (winning performance) becomes a specific game state, a high probability high base state.

[Promotion effect B after matching symbols]
The promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned. The promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned can execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state after a winning game state occurs, before a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable performance (variable display) are displayed on the same symbol and fixedly displayed. In other words, the promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned can execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state by deriving and displaying the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol) that conveys that the specific game state will not occur, by a variable performance (variable display), to disappoint the player once, and execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state before a plurality of decorative symbols are fixedly displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol) (in a state where a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol (here, the same even-numbered symbol)).

First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed toward the bottom, changing at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped, they move slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls will enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 from this point on.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to understand intuitively and are difficult to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. These numbers are placed on the foreground of the display screen 7a, and other images are placed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, so that their visibility is not hindered by other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed and their visibility is not hindered by other images, even when the decorative pattern variation performance (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variation performance (variation display) has ended, so that they can always be seen even in the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the likelihood of winning at the time of the lottery that corresponds to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest likelihood of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest likelihood of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest likelihood of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest likelihood of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest likelihood of winning.

The smiling sphere icon is further set to have a high probability of winning in the following order, for example: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). Other icons include the character A icon and the character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The character A icon with a white aura and the character B icon with a white aura have the same probability of winning as the white sphere icon, but the character A icon and the character B icon have a high probability of winning in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (high probability of winning).

In FIG. 70(A), the normal background image THG1 (here, a forest image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started. At this time, it has already been determined that a specific game state (high probability high base state due to the "16R (actually 15R) V-scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 will occur after the winning game state occurs, but in order to disappoint the player for a moment, the promotion effect B after the symbols are aligned is started by deriving and displaying the same symbol (here, the same number "2") by the variation effect (variable display) to convey that the specific game state will not occur (a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) due to the "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 will occur).

The decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and then, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode in which it moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode in which it moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change performance (changing display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the battle performance starts. The background image of the battle performance is a battle-only background image THG2 that is not included in the normal background image THG1 and is exclusive to the battle performance. When the battle performance starts, the background image switches from the normal background image THG1 to the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other in the center of the display screen 7a unfolds. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same pattern, a win occurs, and then the winning game (winning performance) starts. When the win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. In contrast, in the battle performance, when the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match with the same pattern, resulting in a loss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

When the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting in the battle effect, and the ally character CRA moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character CRB moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed toward the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Continuous hit!" is displayed above the button image BG to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. The message images MG increase the probability of winning in the order of "Press!" → "Continuous hit!" → "Long press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image BG and the message image MG, and the arrow image moves back and forth repeatedly up and down, so that the arrow image can also encourage the player to press the effect button 63 (press the pressing part of the effect button 63 downward). The button image BG, message image MG, and arrow image are configured to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or to disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed if the player does not press the effect button 63.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the first premium background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as the background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable role object 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed.

After that, when the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), as shown in FIG. 70 (F), a special victory background image THG4 conveying the victory of the friendly character CRA is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier image THG3, and the enemy character CRB appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and a specific image consisting of the character CRC affixed to the obverse (front) of a coin is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image starts at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, rolls counterclockwise along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, reaches the left edge, then rolls counterclockwise along the left edge toward the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, reaches the top edge, then rolls counterclockwise along the top edge toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, reaches the right edge, then rolls counterclockwise along the right edge toward the starting point, the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, reaches the bottom edge, and stops rolling. In other words, the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls around the perimeter of the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, the time it takes for the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a (hereinafter referred to as the "rolling time") is 15 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image starts to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a, a countdown begins (time measurement begins), and the position at which the coin is displayed indicates the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image is character B, which may appear as the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. In other words, character B, which may appear as the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

After that, as shown in Figure 70 (G), the enemy character CRB becomes smaller as it moves further away in the depth direction, and flashes EXG are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion display mode. At this time, the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image continues to roll clockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a, and the countdown (timekeeping) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(H), a special winning background image THG5, which conveys a win as a background image, suddenly switches from the victory background image THG4 to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed temporarily stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "2"). Here, after a winning game state occurs, a high probability high base state is supposed to occur due to the specific game state "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, but the same even number "2" is intentionally derived and displayed by a variable presentation (variable display) to convey that the specific game state will not occur, disappointing the player for a moment.

At this time, the display mode in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image rotates clockwise around the display screen 7a continues, and the countdown (timekeeping) continues. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed as a confirmed display, the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 occurs. When the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is confirmed, after the winning game (winning performance), the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), and the high probability low base state (latent probability change state) may be entered. In other words, the game state after the winning game (winning performance) may be a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) instead of the high probability high base state that is the specific game state, in which the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times).

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "2") until the time (rolling time) for the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a and complete one revolution reaches the minimum (zero seconds) remaining, in other words, until the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image has finished rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a.

Based on the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image having completed one revolution by rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a (in other words, when the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image has completed one revolution by rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a and a predetermined waiting period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed for the purpose of teasing the display of the final promotion result), a special promotion background image THG6 notifying the player of the confirmation of promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the winning background image THG5, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), The characters CRC attached to the front (surface) of the coin that constitutes the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily stopped also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable gadget 14 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreated position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then repeatedly moves back and forth in short bursts in the left and right directions at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds).

When a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed and the first movable role 14 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), as shown in FIG. 70 (K), the background image is suddenly switched from the promotion background image THG6 to the second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having a different seven colors from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and the promotion performance B after the pattern alignment ends. Note that when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is a specific game state, occurs. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by making it a different image from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

When the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the change.

In addition, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed and the winning game (winning performance) starts and ends, the game state after the winning game (winning performance) becomes a specific game state, a high probability high base state.

[Promotion effect C after matching symbols]
The promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned. The promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned can execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state after a winning game state occurs, before a plurality of decorative patterns derived and displayed by a variable performance (variable display) are displayed on the same pattern and fixedly displayed. In other words, the promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned can execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state by deriving and displaying the same pattern (here, the same even-numbered pattern) that conveys that the specific game state will not occur, by a variable performance (variable display), to disappoint the player once, and execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state before a plurality of decorative patterns are fixedly displayed on the same pattern (here, the same even-numbered pattern) (in a state where a plurality of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed on the same pattern (here, the same even-numbered pattern)).

First, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped moves slowly (at a low speed) once in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) toward the top (in other words, after the display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move due to the stop display of the decorative pattern being released), and then changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed toward the bottom, changing at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The variable icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently being changed as the first special chart reservation is consumed are displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed (placed) at four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four reservation display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, but they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (both vertical distance dimensions are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stored. Note that the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls will enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 from this point on.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a at all times. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls, so they are easy to distinguish from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are placed on the foreground side of the display screen 7a, and other images are placed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, so that their visibility is not hindered by other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed and their visibility is not hindered by other images, even when the decorative pattern variation performance (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variation performance (variation display) has ended, so that they can always be seen even in the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned.

To briefly explain the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent the differences in the likelihood of winning at the time of the lottery that corresponds to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest likelihood of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest likelihood of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest likelihood of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest likelihood of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest likelihood of winning.

The smiling sphere icon is further set to have a high probability of winning in the following order, for example: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). Other icons include the character A icon and the character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The probability of winning for the character A icon with a white aura and the character B icon with a white aura are the same as for the white sphere icon, but the character A icon and the character B icon are set to have a high probability of winning in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (high probability of winning).

In FIG. 71(A), the normal background image THG1 (here, a forest image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started. At this time, it has already been determined that a specific game state (high probability high base state due to the "16R (actually 15R) V-scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 will occur after the winning game state occurs, but in order to disappoint the player for a moment, the promotion effect C after the symbols are aligned is started by deriving and displaying the same symbol (here, the same number "2") by the variation effect (variable display) to convey that the specific game state will not occur (a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) due to the "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 will occur).

The decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and then, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode in which it moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2" and changes to a display mode in which it moves slowly up and down in small increments, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change performance (changing display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the battle performance starts. The background image of the battle performance is a battle-only background image THG2 that is not included in the normal background image THG1 and is exclusive to the battle performance. When the battle performance starts, the background image switches from the normal background image THG1 to the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other in the center of the display screen 7a unfolds. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) with the same pattern, a win occurs, and then the winning game (winning performance) starts. When the win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. In contrast, in the battle performance, when the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not match with the same pattern, resulting in a loss. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

When the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting in the battle effect, and the ally character CRA moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character CRB moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed toward the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Long press!" that encourages the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. The message images MG increase the probability of winning in the order of "Press!" → "Continuously press!" → "Long press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image BG and the message image MG, and the arrow image moves back and forth repeatedly up and down, so that the arrow image can also encourage the player to press the effect button 63 (press the pressing part of the effect button 63 downward). The button image BG, message image MG, and arrow image are configured to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or to disappear from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed if the player does not press the effect button 63.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time has passed without the effect button 63 being pressed, as shown in FIG. 71(E), the first premium background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as the background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the battle-only background image THG2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable role object 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed.

After that, when the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), as shown in FIG. 71(F), a dedicated victory background image THG4 announcing the victory of the friendly character CRA is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premiere image THG3, as the background image, and the enemy character CRB appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and a specific image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, in which the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover part of the character CRC. Specifically, the character CRC is attached to the entire surface (front) of the coin, and a countdown image NJ is arranged below the surface (front) of the coin so as to cover part of the character CRC.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image has a center point (hereinafter simply referred to as "center point") at the intersection of a vertical line passing through the top and bottom points of the coin (hereinafter simply referred to as "the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image") and a horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the coin (hereinafter simply referred to as "the horizontal line of the coin that constitutes the specific image").

The countdown image NJ displays number images that count down (time) within a circular shape, and the vertical line passing through the top and bottom points of the circle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image") coincides with the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image. In addition, the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "horizontal line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image") does not coincide with the horizontal line of the coin that constitutes the specific image, but is parallel to it, and the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circle is located below the horizontal line of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rotates counterclockwise and clockwise around a central point, and the character CRC also sways in conjunction with the swinging of the coin as it repeats such rotations. In contrast, the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image, which is arranged to cover part of the character CRC, is arranged on the obverse (front) of the coin, but unlike the character CRC, does not sway in conjunction with the swinging of the coin. When the coin rotates counterclockwise around its central point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image moves in parallel to the left of the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image, and when the coin rotates clockwise around its central point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image moves in parallel to the right of the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image.

Even if the vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image moves parallel to the left or right of the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image, the distance dimension between the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image and the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image does not change. In other words, the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image simply moves horizontally to the left when the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, and simply moves horizontally to the right when the coin rotates clockwise around the center point.

The number image displayed within the circle in the countdown image NJ is a number image that counts down (times), and in this embodiment, it is 15 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image and the countdown image NJ are displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown begins (times start), and the number image that counts down (times) in the countdown image NJ indicates the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image is character B, which may appear as the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. In other words, character B, which may appear as the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(G), the enemy character CRB becomes smaller as it moves further away in the depth direction, and flashes EXG are emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, resulting in an explosion display mode. At this time, the character CRC continues to swing in conjunction with the swinging of the coin that constitutes the specific image, and the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image also continues to move horizontally left and right, and the countdown (timekeeping) by the number images of this countdown image NJ continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(H), a special winning background image THG5, which conveys a win as a background image, suddenly switches from the victory background image THG4 to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed temporarily stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "2"). Here, after a winning game state occurs, a high probability high base state is supposed to occur due to the specific game state "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, but the same even number "2" is intentionally derived and displayed by a variable presentation (variable display) to convey that the specific game state will not occur, disappointing the player for a moment.

At this time, the display mode in which the character CRC also swings in conjunction with the swing of the coin that constitutes the specific image continues, and the display mode in which the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image also moves horizontally left and right continues, and the countdown (timekeeping) by the number images of this countdown image NJ continues. Note that when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed as a confirmed display, the "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled passing jackpot" shown in Figure 9 occurs. When the "16R (actually 13R) V-scheduled passing jackpot" is confirmed, after the winning game (winning performance), a variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), and a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) may be entered. In other words, after a winning game (winning performance), the game state may change to a high probability low base state (latent probability change state) rather than a high probability high base state, which is a specific game state, in which the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times).

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a state in which they are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "2") until the number image counting down (timekeeping) in the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image reaches zero seconds.

Based on the fact that the number image counting down (timekeeping) in the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image has reached zero seconds (in other words, when the number image counting down (timekeeping) in the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image has reached zero seconds and a predetermined waiting period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed for the purpose of teasing the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 71(J), a promotion background image THG6 dedicated to notifying the confirmation of promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the winning background image THG5, and the surface (positive) of the coin constituting the specific image is displayed. The characters CRC and countdown image NJ attached to the left and right sides of the display screen 7a disappear, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable gadget 14 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreated position (home position) to the left of the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then repeatedly moves back and forth in short bursts in the left and right directions at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds).

When a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed and the first movable device 14 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), as shown in FIG. 71 (K), the background image is suddenly switched from the promotion background image THG6 to the second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7"), which has a different seven colors from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and the promotion performance C after the pattern alignment ends. Note that when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), the "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 9, which is a specific game state, occurs. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by making it a different image from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

When the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the change.

In addition, when the "16RV passing jackpot" is confirmed and the winning game (winning performance) starts and ends, the game state after the winning game (winning performance) becomes a specific game state, a high probability high base state.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the promotion effect that occurs after matching symbols.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 71, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a first performance (in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned, the first performance (in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned, the first performance (in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned, the first performance (in the promotion performance B ... In promotion performance B after matching patterns, a specific image is displayed as in Figures 70 (F) to (I) consisting of an indicator image TB and a character CRC; in promotion performance B after matching patterns, a specific image is displayed as in Figures 70 (F) to (I) consisting of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin; and in promotion performance C after matching patterns, a specific image is displayed as in Figures 71 (F) to (I) consisting of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC). According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are not displayed in a winning state, a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed after the occurrence of a winning game state. Therefore, if the multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by the variable performance (variable display) are displayed in a winning state, and as a result the specific game state does not occur, even if the multiple decorative patterns are not displayed in a winning state (i.e., the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a temporary stop state in a winning state), a promotion performance suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state can be executed by displaying a specific image. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the promotion performance A after patterns are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after patterns are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after patterns are aligned in FIG. 71 is performed after the second performance in which the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win, in the promotion performance A after patterns are aligned in FIG. 69 (E), the second performance in which the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win, in the promotion performance B after patterns are aligned in FIG. 70 (E), the second performance in which the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win, and the second performance in the promotion performance C after patterns are aligned in FIG. 71 (E) is performed after the second performance in which the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 suggesting a win. According to this configuration, the second performance first suggests a win, giving the player a sense of security, and furthermore, the promotion performance of the first performance following the second performance can heighten anticipation for the occurrence of a specific game state.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 71, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state in FIG. 69(H) and (I) of the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned, the display of a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC can be continued, and in FIG. 70(H) and (I) of the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern Even when 8R (plural decorative symbols) is displayed in a winning state, the display of a specific image with the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin can be continued, and even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning state in Fig. 71 (H) and (I) of the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned, the display of a specific image with the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC can be continued. According to this configuration, since the display of the specific image continues even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning state, the player can be given the feeling that the display mode of the multiple decorative symbols may change to another display mode, and the player's expectation for the change in the display mode of the multiple decorative symbols can be aroused.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 71, when the specific image consisting of the indicator image TB and the character CRC in FIG. 69 (J) of the promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) displayed in a winning state disappear, the second movable role 15 (movable body) moves from the retreat position to the advance position. When the second movable device 15 (movable body) returns to the retreat position, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed as a specific pattern, the number "7," to indicate the occurrence of a specific game state. In FIG. 70 (J) of the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned, a specific image is displayed in which the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state. When the first movable part 14 (movable body) moves from the retreat position to the advance position, and when the first movable part 14 (movable body) returns to the retreat position again, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed as the specific pattern, the number "7", to indicate the occurrence of a specific game state. In FIG. 71 (J) of the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin, and a countdown image is displayed to cover a part of the character CRC. When the specific image composed of NJs arranged and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) displayed in a winning state disappear, the first movable part 14 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, and when the first movable part 14 (movable body) returns to the retracted position again, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed as the specific pattern, the number "7", thereby indicating the occurrence of a specific game state. According to this configuration, when the specific image and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) displayed in a winning state disappear, the movable body suddenly moves from the retracted position to the advanced position and appears, so that the performance using the movable body has an impact, and further, when the movable body returns to the retracted position again, the number "7", which is the specific pattern indicating the occurrence of a specific game state, is displayed with all the multiple decorative patterns aligned, so that the success of the promotion performance due to the appearance of the movable body (confirmation of the occurrence of a specific game state) can be emphasized to the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the specific images in the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 71 are images that convey the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state, as shown in FIG. 69(F) to (I), and the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin in FIG. 70(F) to (I) in the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned. The specific image constituted by the above is an image conveying the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) are definitively displayed in a winning state, and in the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned, the specific image constituted by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin in Fig. 71 (F) to (I) and arranging the countdown image NJ so as to cover a part of the character CRC is an image conveying the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plural decorative patterns) are definitively displayed in a winning state. According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image conveying the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the multiple decorative patterns are definitively displayed in a winning state, in other words, it is possible to convey the remaining time (approximate remaining time until the promotion performance starts) until the promotion performance starts, so that the time when the promotion performance starts (approximate guideline for when the promotion performance starts) can be suitably displayed.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the promotion effect after matching symbols are shown.
[Modification 1]
The promotion performance A after the symbols are aligned in Fig. 69, the promotion performance B after the symbols are aligned in Fig. 70, and the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned in Fig. 71 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-hand hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-hand hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the promotion performance A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, when the promotion performance is successful due to the appearance of a movable object (the occurrence of a specific game state is confirmed), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern of the number "7" (i.e., in a winning state), and the occurrence of the specific game state is communicated to the player. However, the promotion performance may fail (the specific game state does not occur) due to the appearance of a movable object. In this way, it is possible to provide variation to the promotion performance after the symbols are aligned.

[Modification 3]
In the promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 71, a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are fixedly displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in a winning state) is conveyed. At this time, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) may be announced by a voice such as "5 seconds remaining" from the speaker 67. In this way, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) can be conveyed to the player by the specific image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the voice from the speaker 67, making it easier for the player to grasp the remaining time (approximate remaining time).

[Modification 4]
In the promotion performance A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are definitively displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in a winning state). However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a to display a specific image on the transparent light guide plate. In this case, since there is a limit to the number of images that can be displayed on the light guide plate, the light guide plate does not convey the remaining time (approximate remaining time) every second, but instead displays, for example, "15 seconds remaining,""5 seconds remaining," or "0 seconds remaining." By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around the transparent light guide plate, the full-color LEDs can emit light to change color as the remaining time (approximate remaining time) shortens, for example, displaying "15 seconds remaining" in bright white, "5 seconds remaining" in bright blue, and "0 seconds remaining" in red. Even if the remaining time (approximate remaining time) appears in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 5]
In the promotion performance A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, the same symbols (same even-numbered symbols) that convey that a specific game state will not occur are derived and displayed by a variable performance (variable display) to disappoint the player for a moment, and then a promotion performance is executed that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state. However, there may be cases where the promotion performance is not executed. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the promotion performance may be executed, and it is also possible to increase the variety of performances after the derived display by the variable performance (variable display).

[Modification 6]
In the promotion performance A after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned in FIG. 71, the same symbols (same even-numbered symbols) that convey that the specific game state will not occur are derived and displayed by a variable performance (variable display) to disappoint the player once, and then the promotion performance is executed to suggest the occurrence of the specific game state. The specific game state was the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9. However, the specific game state may be the "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9 instead of the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 9. Even with this configuration, the game state after the winning game (winning performance) is a high probability high base state in the "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" as in the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot".

[Modification 7]
In the promotion performance A after the symbols are aligned in Fig. 69, the promotion performance B after the symbols are aligned in Fig. 70, and the promotion performance C after the symbols are aligned in Fig. 71, the same symbols (same even-numbered symbols) that convey that a specific game state will not occur are derived and displayed by a variable performance (variable display) to disappoint the player for a moment, and then a promotion performance is executed that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state. However, it is also possible to derive and display the same symbols (number "7" (or number "3")) that suggest the occurrence of a specific game state by a variable performance (variable display) to execute a promotion performance that suggests the occurrence of a specific game state.

[Modification 8]
In the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 71, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in the form of a win) in FIG. 69(H) and (I) of the promotion performance A after the patterns are aligned, the display of a specific image consisting of the indicator image TB and the character CRC is continued until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB, and in the promotion performance B after the patterns are aligned in FIG. 70(H) and (I) of the promotion performance B, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in the form of a win), the display of a specific image consisting of the indicator image TB and the character CRC is continued until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB. The display of the specific image with the character CRC attached continues until the time (rolling time) for the specific image (character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin) to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a becomes the minimum (zero seconds) remaining, and even in the state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in a winning mode) in Figures 71 (H) and (I) of the promotion performance C after the patterns are aligned, the display of the specific image with the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC continues until the number image counting down (timed) in the countdown image NJ reaches zero seconds. However, the display of the specific image may be ended before zero seconds (any time from the timed to zero seconds). In this case, a promotion background image THG6 dedicated to the confirmation of promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the winning background image THG5, the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily stopped also disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the second movable role object 15 advances (moves) again from a state in which it is stationary at a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which is the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). In this way, the second movable role object 15 suddenly advances before the time reaches zero seconds (any time from the time clocking to the time reaching zero seconds), thereby emphasizing the occurrence of the promotion performance as a performance with an impact. The any time from the time clocking to the time reaching zero seconds is determined by the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 9]
The character CRC of the specific image in the promotion performance A after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 69, the promotion performance B after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 70, and the promotion performance C after the pattern is aligned in FIG. 71 is the character B that may appear as the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B that may appear as the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C appeared on the display screen 7a as the character CRC of the specific image. However, the character CRC of the specific image may be a promotion performance character that appears only in the promotion performances A to C after the pattern is aligned, or a premium character that appears when a so-called premium image is displayed may also appear in the promotion performances A to C after the pattern is aligned. In either case, since it is a character that can be rarely seen, it can contribute to further enhancing the performance effect of the promotion performances A to C after the pattern is aligned.

[Modification 10]
Promotion effect A after matching patterns in Figure 69, promotion effect B after matching patterns in Figure 70, and promotion effect C after matching patterns in Figure 71 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Before the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a winning manner, a first performance can be executed in which a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state after a winning game state occurs is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
The first effect is performed after a second effect that displays an image suggesting a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A7-3
A gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or A7-2,
In the first performance, the display of the specific image can be continued even when the plurality of decorative patterns are displayed in the winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
A movable body that moves between a retreated position and an advanced position is provided,
In the first performance, when the specific image and the plurality of decorative symbols displayed in the winning mode disappear, the movable body moves from the retreat position to the advance position, and when the movable body returns to the retreat position again, the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed as specific symbols to indicate the occurrence of the specific game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-4,
The specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time until the plurality of decorative patterns are definitively displayed in the winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reserved symbol effects A to C are explained below using Figures 72 to 74. These reserved symbol effects can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reserved symbol effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Reserved pattern production A]
Figure 72 is a diagram to explain the reserved pattern presentation A.
The reserved pattern performance A is a performance in which the reserved pattern HZ stops in place of the center performance pattern 8C after the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R stop.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold correspond to the first memory area, the second memory area, and the third memory area of the first special pattern hold memory area 85a, respectively. Here, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area is the target hold TH that is the target of the hold change. At this point, the hold icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are white.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (B), a reserved pattern stop performance is executed. The reserved pattern stop performance is executed after the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R have stopped. In the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R stop performance, first, the speed of change of the left performance pattern 8L slows down and the change of the left performance pattern 8L becomes visible, and then the left performance pattern 8L stops. Next, the speed of change of the right performance pattern 8R slows down and the change of the right performance pattern 8R becomes visible, and then the right performance pattern 8R stops. Here, the left performance pattern 8L stops at "1" and the right performance pattern 8R stops at "2".

The reserved pattern stop effect is an effect in which the reserved pattern HZ, which imitates the reserved icon 9A (the relevant variable icon 9C), stops after the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R stop. This reserved pattern HZ is a pattern that suggests the expected probability of a hit with the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved pattern HZ is a circular pattern that imitates the reserved icon 9A (the relevant variable icon 9C), and is red in color, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a hit with the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. In the reserved pattern stop effect, for example, the fluctuation speed of the middle performance pattern 8C slows down, and after the fluctuation of the middle performance pattern 8C becomes visible, the reserved pattern HZ, which is fluctuating mixed with the middle performance pattern 8C, stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a reserved symbol enlargement effect is executed. The reserved symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the size of the stopped reserved symbol HZ increases. Here, a circular, red reserved symbol HZ is shown enlarged. Note that the reserved symbol HZ is enlarged so that it does not overlap with the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, but it may be enlarged until it overlaps with the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may also be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), a reserved symbol reduction effect is executed. The reserved symbol reduction effect is an effect in which the size of the enlarged reserved symbol HZ becomes smaller and moves in a direction away from the target reserved TH (reserved icon 9A). Here, as shown by arrow K1, the reserved image HZ moves to the periphery of the display screen 7a. At this time, too, the left and right performance symbols 8L, 8R may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), a reserved symbol movement effect is executed. The reserved symbol movement effect is an effect in which the reserved symbol HZ moves to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved image HZ that has moved to the periphery of the display screen 7a moves to the target reserved TH in a parabolic arc, as shown by the arrow K2. Of course, it may move in a straight line. At this time, the reserved symbol HZ may be moved at a constant speed, or may be moved so that it gradually speeds up (for example, as if a constant acceleration is acting). The latter method results in a powerful movement effect. At this time, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), a reserved symbol collision presentation is executed. The reserved symbol collision presentation is a presentation that displays an image indicating that the reserved symbol HZ has collided with the target reserved TH. Here, a radial image is displayed with the target reserved TH at the center. Note that a moving image may be displayed instead of a still image. For example, a moving image of particles scattering radially or a moving image of an explosion spewing smoke may be used. In this way, the presentation of the reserved change becomes more innovative and anticipation for the reserved change is heightened. In this case, the left and right presentation patterns 8L and 8R may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, the player is more likely to focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), a reserve change effect is executed. A reserve change effect is an effect in which the target reserve TH changes state. Here, the display color of the target reserve TH changes to the same red as the reserve pattern HZ. Here, the variable display of the middle performance pattern 8C is performed again. At this time, if the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R are not displayed or are semi-transparent, it is possible to return the display state of the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R to their original state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is confirmed and stopped at "1", the middle effect pattern 8C is confirmed and stopped at "5", and the right effect pattern 8R is confirmed and stopped at "2". At the same time as the confirmed stop display, the variable icon 9C is also hidden.

[Reserved pattern production B]
Figure 73 is a diagram for explaining reserved pattern presentation B.
The reserved pattern effect B is an effect in which the reserved pattern HZ stops in place of the medium effect pattern 8C after the reach formation effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold correspond to the first memory area, the second memory area, and the third memory area of the first special pattern hold memory area 85a, respectively. Here, the corresponding change icon 9C is the target hold TH that is the target of the hold change. Note that the hold icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are white at this point.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (B), the reserved pattern stop performance is executed. The reserved pattern stop performance is executed after the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R have stopped. In the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R stop performance, first, the speed of change of the left performance pattern 8L slows down and the change of the left performance pattern 8L becomes visible, and then the left performance pattern 8L stops. Next, the speed of change of the right performance pattern 8R slows down and the change of the right performance pattern 8R becomes visible, and then the right performance pattern 8R stops. Here, the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R are shown as "7", forming a reach.

The reserved pattern stop effect is an effect in which the reserved pattern HZ, which imitates the reserved icon 9A (the relevant variable icon 9C), stops after the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R stop. This reserved pattern HZ is a pattern that suggests the expected probability of a hit with the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved pattern HZ is a circular pattern that imitates the reserved icon 9A (the relevant variable icon 9C), and is red in color, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a hit with the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. In the reserved pattern stop effect, for example, the fluctuation speed of the middle performance pattern 8C slows down, and after the fluctuation of the middle performance pattern 8C becomes visible, the reserved pattern HZ, which is fluctuating mixed with the middle performance pattern 8C, stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a reserved symbol enlargement effect is executed. The reserved symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the size of the stopped reserved symbol HZ increases. Here, a circular, red reserved symbol HZ is shown enlarged. Note that the reserved symbol HZ is enlarged so that it does not overlap with the left performance symbol 8L or the right performance symbol 8R, but it may be enlarged until it overlaps with the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may also be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), a reserved symbol reduction effect is executed. The reserved symbol reduction effect is an effect in which the size of the enlarged reserved symbol HZ becomes smaller and moves in a direction away from the target reserved TH (the variable icon 9C). Here, as shown by the arrow K1, the reserved image HZ moves to the periphery of the display screen 7a. At this time, too, the left and right performance symbols 8L, 8R may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), a reserved symbol movement effect is executed. The reserved symbol movement effect is an effect in which the reserved symbol HZ moves to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved image HZ that has moved to the periphery of the display screen 7a moves to the target reserved TH in a parabolic arc, as shown by the arrow K2. Of course, it may also move in a straight line. At this time, the reserved symbol HZ may be moved at a constant speed, or may be moved so that it gradually speeds up (for example, as if a constant acceleration is acting). The latter method results in a powerful movement effect. At this time, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), a reserved symbol collision presentation is executed. The reserved symbol collision presentation is a presentation that displays an image indicating that the reserved symbol HZ has collided with the target reserved TH. Here, a radial image is displayed with the target reserved TH at the center. Note that a moving image may be displayed instead of a still image. For example, a moving image of particles scattering radially or a moving image of an explosion spewing smoke may be used. In this way, the presentation of the reserved change becomes more innovative and anticipation for the reserved change is heightened. In this case, the left and right presentation patterns 8L and 8R may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, the player is more likely to focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (G), a reserve change effect is executed. A reserve change effect is an effect in which the target reserve TH changes state. Here, the display color of the target reserve TH changes to the same red as the reserve pattern HZ. Here, the variable display of the middle performance pattern 8C is performed again. At this time, if the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R are not displayed or are semi-transparent, it is possible to return the display state of the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R to their original state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. A fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are all "7", which is a repeat number. At the same time as the fixed stop display, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[Reserved pattern production C]
Figure 74 is a diagram for explaining the reserved pattern presentation C.
The reserved pattern effect C is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L stops and then the reserved pattern HZ stops in place of the right performance pattern 8R.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern hold correspond to the first memory area, the second memory area, and the third memory area of the first special pattern hold memory area 85a, respectively. Here, the corresponding change icon 9C is the target hold TH that is the target of the hold change. Note that the hold icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are white at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), the reserved pattern stop effect is executed. The reserved pattern stop effect is executed after the left performance pattern 8L has stopped. The left performance pattern 8L stops after the rate of change slows down and the change becomes visible. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown stopped at "7".

The reserved pattern stop effect is an effect in which the reserved pattern HZ, which imitates the reserved icon 9A (the corresponding variable icon 9C), stops following the stopping of the left performance pattern 8L. This reserved pattern HZ is a pattern that suggests the expected probability of a win with the fluctuation corresponding to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved pattern HZ is a circular pattern imitating the reserved icon 9A (the corresponding variable icon 9C) and includes the text image of "super hot". In the reserved pattern stop effect, for example, the fluctuation speed of the right performance pattern 8R slows down, and after the fluctuation of the right performance pattern 8R becomes visible, the reserved pattern HZ, which is fluctuating mixed with the right performance pattern 8R, stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), a reserved symbol enlargement effect is executed. The reserved symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the size of the stopped reserved symbol HZ increases. Here, an enlarged reserved symbol HZ containing a circular text image of "Super Hot" is shown. Note that the left performance symbol 8L may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), a reserved pattern reduction effect is executed. The reserved pattern reduction effect is an effect in which the size of the enlarged reserved pattern HZ becomes smaller and moves in a direction away from the target reserved TH (the variable icon 9C). Here, as shown by the arrow K1, the reserved image HZ moves to the periphery of the display screen 7a. At this time, too, the left effect pattern 8L may be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved pattern HZ, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a reserved symbol movement effect is executed. The reserved symbol movement effect is an effect in which the reserved symbol HZ moves to the target reserved TH. Here, the reserved image HZ that has moved to the periphery of the display screen 7a moves to the target reserved TH in a parabolic arc, as shown by the arrow K2. Of course, it may also move in a straight line. At this time, the reserved symbol HZ may be moved at a constant speed, or may be moved so that it gradually speeds up (for example, as if a constant acceleration is acting). The latter method results in a powerful movement effect. At this time, the left performance symbol 8L may also be made invisible or semi-transparent. In this way, there is a high possibility that the player will focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), a reserved symbol collision presentation is executed. The reserved symbol collision presentation is a presentation that displays an image indicating that the reserved symbol HZ has collided with the target reserved TH. Here, a radial image is displayed with the target reserved TH at the center. Note that a moving image may be displayed instead of a still image. For example, a moving image of particles scattering radially or a moving image of an explosion spewing smoke may be used. In this way, the presentation of the reserved change becomes more innovative and anticipation for the reserved change is heightened. In this case, the left presentation pattern 8L may also be made non-displayable or semi-transparent. In this way, the player is more likely to focus only on the behavior of the reserved symbol HZ, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), a reserve change effect is executed. A reserve change effect is an effect in which the target reserve TH changes state. Here, the display color of the target reserve TH changes to red in accordance with the character string "Super Hot" in the reserve pattern HZ. Here, the changing display of the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R is performed again. At this time, if the left performance pattern 8L is not displayed or is semi-transparent, it is possible to return the display state of the left performance pattern 8L to its original state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop in a specific manner. In this example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are both "7".

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the reserved pattern presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved pattern HZ is stopped instead of the center performance pattern 8C or the right performance pattern 8R (Fig. 72 (B), Fig. 73 (B), Fig. 74 (B), "Pattern stop performance"), and the stopped reserved pattern HZ is moved to the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C (target reserved TH) (Fig. 72 (E), Fig. 73 (E), Fig. 74 (E), "Movement display performance"), and the state of the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is changed to a state according to the transition expectation degree suggested by the reserved pattern HZ (Fig. 72 (G), Fig. 73 (G), Fig. 74 (G), "Reserved state change performance"). According to this configuration, the performance regarding the state change of the reserved image (reserved icon and the variable icon) can be made novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stopped reserved symbol HZ is enlarged (FIG. 72(C), FIG. 73(C), FIG. 74(C)) and then moved to the target reserved TH. According to this configuration, the player can be surprised by the performance regarding the change in the state of the reserved image, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enlarged reserved pattern HZ is reduced and moved away from the target reserved TH (FIG. 72(D), FIG. 73(D), FIG. 74(D)), and then moved to the target reserved TH. According to this configuration, the player can be surprised by the performance regarding the change in the state of the reserved image, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved symbol HZ is moved from the periphery of the display screen 7a to the target reserved TH in a curved line (FIG. 72(E), FIG. 73(E), FIG. 74(E)). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised by the performance related to the change in the state of the reserved image, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the reserved symbol HZ reaches the target reserved TH, a radial image indicating a collision is displayed (FIG. 72(F), FIG. 73(F), FIG. 74(F)). According to this configuration, the performance regarding the change in the state of the reserved image can give the player surprise and expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved symbol HZ can stop instead of the middle performance symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol after the reach formation performance (FIG. 73(B)). According to this configuration, the state of the target reserved TH (for example, the variable icon 9C) changes after the reach formation, which can give the player surprise and expectation, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of reserved pattern presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved symbol effects A and B, the display color of the reserved symbol HZ is red, and the display color of the target reserved symbol TH also changes from white to red. On the other hand, the display color of the reserved symbol may be set according to the degree of expectation, for example, blue, green, purple, red, or gold. Here, it is considered that the higher the degree of expectation, the closer to gold it becomes.
In the above, when the display color of the reserved pattern is "red", the display color of the target reserved also changes to "red", but when the display color of the reserved pattern is "red", the display color of the target reserved may be changed to another color. In other words, the display color of the reserved pattern and the display color of the target reserved do not have to match.
In this way, when the display color of the reserved symbol and the display color of the target reserved do not match, it is possible to make the display color of the target reserved after the change more promising than the display color of the reserved symbol. This is because if the display color of the target reserved after the change becomes less promising, the player will be disappointed.
In addition, if the display color of the reserved pattern and the display color of the target reserved pattern do not match in this manner, a jackpot may be confirmed.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the reserved pattern includes the character string "super hot", the target reserved is changed to "red", but this is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to associate "super hot" with "gold", or to associate "super hot" with two or more display colors. When associating with two or more display colors, the colors may be selected randomly, or when there is a difference in the degree of expectation for the same "super hot", "purple", "red", or "gold" may be selected according to the degree of expectation. Of course, other than "super hot", character strings such as "so-so" or "chance" may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to associate "so-so" with "blue" and "chance" with "green".

[Modification 3]
In the above, during one change, the performance from the reserved symbol stop performance to the reserved symbol change performance is performed. In contrast, during one change, the performance from the reserved symbol stop performance to the reserved symbol change performance may be performed two or more times. For example, after the reach formation performance is performed in FIG. 74 (H), the performance after the reserved symbol stop performance in FIG. 73 (B) may be performed.

[Modification 4]
The above is an example of a performance in which the reserved pattern HZ is stopped in place of the middle performance pattern 8C or the right performance pattern 8R, but it is also possible to stop the reserved pattern HZ in place of the left performance pattern 8L.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine that displays a reserved image in correspondence with a reserved memory that is a memory of information regarding a reserved change,
A pattern stop effect in which a pattern in a predetermined row among the patterns variably displayed in a plurality of rows stops at a reserved pattern that imitates the reserved image and indicates the expectation of a transition to an advantageous game;
A moving display effect in which the reserved pattern stopped in the pattern stop effect is moved to the reserved image;
When the reserved pattern moves to the reserved image in the moving display performance, a reserved state change performance is executed in which the state of the reserved image is changed to a state set according to the transition expectation degree suggested by the reserved pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-1,
In the moving display performance, the stopped reserved pattern is enlarged and then moved to the reserved image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-1,
In the moving display performance, the stopped reserved pattern is enlarged, then reduced, and moved in a direction away from the reserved image, and then moved to the reserved image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-1,
In the moving display performance, the stopped reserved pattern is enlarged, then reduced and moved in a direction away from the reserved image, and then moved from the periphery of the display screen to the reserved image in a curved trajectory.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-4,
In the moving display performance, when the reserved pattern reaches the reserved image, an image showing a collision is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-5,
The symbol stop effect is executed after a reach formation effect in which the variably displayed symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined manner, and the reserved symbols are stopped instead of the final stop symbols that stop after the reach formation effect and determine the winning or losing result.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the symbol change stop effects A to C using Figures 75 to 77. This symbol change stop effect can be executed during the change effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the symbol change stop effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Pattern change stop effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the pattern change stop performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are changing at high speed. The performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move on the tracks K1, K2, and K3, respectively. The tracks K1, K2, and K3 are tracks that span the first area 7b at the top of the display screen 7a and the second area 7c at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that the reserved icon and the change icon are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a left pattern slow-changing effect is executed. The left pattern slow-changing effect is an effect in which the rate of change of the left performance pattern 8L slows down, and the left performance pattern 8L is displayed while changing so that it can be seen. Here, the performance patterns 8L are displayed as "5", "6", and "7", moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance pattern 8L changes on the trajectory K1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L is stopped and one left performance pattern 8L is determined. The one left performance pattern 8L determined stops at the stop position 7d provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" pattern is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (D), a right pattern slow-changing effect is executed. The right pattern slow-changing effect is an effect in which the rate of change of the right pattern 8L slows down, and the right pattern 8L is displayed while being visible. Here, the numbers "5", "6", and "7" are displayed as the pattern 8L, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the pattern 8R changes on the trajectory K3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the right pattern 8R is stopped and one right pattern 8R is determined. The determined one right pattern 8R stops at the stop position 7e provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" pattern is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (F), a middle symbol slow-changing effect is executed. The middle symbol slow-changing effect is an effect in which the speed of change of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C is displayed while being visible. Here, the symbols 8C are "5", "6", and "7", and are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the symbol 8C changes on the trajectory K2.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (G), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which a middle symbol 8C is stopped and one middle symbol 8C is determined. The determined middle symbol 8C stops at the stop position 7f provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" symbol is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of a win or loss in a winning game. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are all "7" patterns, indicating a win. In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed across the first area 7b and the second area 7c.

[Pattern change stop effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the pattern change stop effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are changing at high speed. The performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move on the tracks K1, K2, and K3, respectively. The tracks K1, K2, and K3 are tracks that span the first area 7b at the top of the display screen 7a and the second area 7c at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that the reserved icon and the change icon are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which an image is displayed in a first area 7b provided on the display screen 7a. Here, an image SG containing the text image "Super Hot" is displayed. This image SG is an image that suggests the likelihood of transitioning to a big win game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), a left pattern slow-changing effect is executed. The left pattern slow-changing effect is an effect in which the rate of change of the left performance pattern 8L slows down, and the left performance pattern 8L is displayed while being visible. Here, the performance patterns 8L are displayed as "5" and "6", moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance pattern 8L changes on a trajectory included in the second region 7c of the trajectory K1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L is stopped and one left performance pattern 8L is determined. The one left performance pattern 8L determined stops at the stop position 7d provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" pattern is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (E), a right pattern slow-changing effect is executed. The right pattern slow-changing effect is an effect in which the rate of change of the right pattern 8L slows down, and the right pattern 8L is displayed while being visible. Here, the effect patterns 8L are displayed as "5" and "6", moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect pattern 8R changes on a trajectory included in the second region 7c of the trajectory K3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the right pattern 8R is stopped and one right pattern 8R is determined. The determined one right pattern 8R stops at the stop position 7e provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" pattern is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (G), a middle symbol slow-changing effect is executed. The middle symbol slow-changing effect is an effect in which the speed of change of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C is displayed while changing and visible. Here, the symbols 8C are displayed as "5" and "6" moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the symbol 8C changes on a trajectory included in the second region 7c of the trajectory K2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 76 (H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C is stopped and one middle symbol 8C is determined. The determined one middle symbol 8C stops at the stop position 7f provided in the second area 7c. Here, the state in which the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed is shown.
In addition, following the middle symbol stopping effect, the winning/losing notification effect shown in Figure 75 (H) may be executed.

[Pattern change stop effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the pattern change stop effect C.
Here, the configuration is such that an image display device 6 is provided in addition to the image display device 7, and the display screen 6a of the image display device 6 is disposed below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display screen 6a is provided with a first area 6b, and the display screen 7a is provided with a second area 7c.

First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a change start effect is executed. A change start effect is an effect in which the effect patterns start changing. Here, effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing and are shown changing at high speed. The effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move on trajectories K1, K2, and K3, respectively. The trajectories K1, K2, and K3 are trajectories that span the first area 6b of the display screen 6a and the second area 7c of the display screen 7a. Note that the pending icon and the change icon are omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a left symbol slow-changing effect is executed. The left symbol slow-changing effect is an effect in which the rate of change of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L is displayed while being visible. Here, the symbols 8L are "5", "6", and "7", and are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the symbol 8L changes on the trajectory K1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L is stopped and one left performance pattern 8L is determined. The one left performance pattern 8L determined stops at the stop position 7d provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" pattern is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which an image is displayed in the first area 6b provided on the display screen 6a. Here, an image SG containing the text image "Super Hot" is displayed. This image SG is an image that suggests the likelihood of transitioning to a big win game.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (E), a right pattern slow-changing effect is executed. The right pattern slow-changing effect is an effect in which the rate of change of the right pattern 8L slows down, and the right pattern 8L is displayed while being visible. Here, the effect patterns 8L are displayed as "5" and "6", moving in the direction indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the effect pattern 8R changes on a trajectory included in the second region 7c of the trajectory K3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a right pattern stop effect is executed. In the right pattern stop effect, the right pattern 8R is stopped and one right pattern 8R is determined. The determined one right pattern 8R stops at the stop position 7e provided in the second area 7c. Here, the "7" pattern is shown stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins, the game is a win. In the battle performance, a display spanning both the display screen 6a and the display screen 7a is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of a win or loss in a winning game. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are all "7" patterns, indicating a win. In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed across the first area 6b and the second area 7c.

In addition, it is conceivable that the first mode of the pattern changing display and the second mode of the pattern changing display may be used selectively based on the expectation of transition to a winning game.
In this embodiment, the higher the expected probability of transition to a winning game, the more likely it is that the second mode of the pattern changing display will be selected instead of the first mode of the pattern changing display.

In addition, when changing from the first mode of the pattern changing display to the second mode of the pattern changing display during the change, it is possible to determine the timing of the change depending on the expectation of transitioning to a winning game. For example, the greater the expectation of transitioning to a winning game, the earlier the timing of the change to the second mode within one change. In this sense, the pattern changing stop performance B offers more hope than the pattern changing stop performance C.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the pattern change stop performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first area 7b (6b) and the second area 7c separate from the first area 7b (6b) are provided on the display screen 7a (6a). Then, the first mode of the pattern change display (FIGS. 75(A)(B)(D)(F), 76(A), 77(A)(B)) in which the patterns are changed on the tracks K1, K2, K3 that span the first area 7b (6b) and the second area 7c, and the second mode of the pattern change display (FIGS. 76(C)(E)(G), 77(E)) in which the patterns are changed only on the tracks included in the second area 7c among the tracks K1, K2, K3 by displaying the image SG in the first area 7b (6b) can be executed. According to this configuration, the pattern change display is performed in a plurality of modes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the targets of the first mode of the pattern change display or the second mode of the pattern change display are the left, center, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pattern change stop performance A and B, and the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R in the pattern change stop performance C. According to this configuration, the variety of the pattern change display increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the symbol change stop presentation C, the first area 6a is provided on the display screen 6a of the image display device 6, and the second area 7c is provided on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that is separate from the image display device 6. According to this configuration, the symbol change display of the first mode is a display that spans the display screens 6a and 7a, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in both the first mode of the pattern changing display and the second mode of the pattern changing display, the stop positions 7d, 7e, and 7f are provided on the track included in the second area 7c (FIGS. 75(C)(E)(G), 76(D)(F)(H), and 77(C)(F)). According to this configuration, since the stop positions are fixed within the second area 7c, the stop positions are easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the higher the expectation of a transition to a winning game, the more likely it is that the second mode of the symbol change display will be selected instead of the first mode of the symbol change display. With this configuration, the expectation of a winning game increases due to the change in the mode of the symbol change display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image SC is an image that suggests the expectation of transition to a winning game. According to this configuration, the image displayed in the first area 7b (6b) also increases the expectation of a winning game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pattern change stopping performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the trajectories K1, K2, and K3 are straight lines, but they may be changed on a curved trajectory. Also, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed while changing their size. For example, it is possible to display them largest at the stop position and smaller as they move away from the stop position. Conversely, it is possible to display them smallest at the stop position and larger as they move away from the stop position.

[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned winning/losing notification performance (FIG. 75(H), FIG. 77(H)), all the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed across the first area 7b (6b) and the second area 7c, but some of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed so as to span the two areas. In this case, some of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged.

[Modification 3]
In the above-mentioned pattern change stop performance C, the first area 6a is provided on the display screen 6a of the image display device 6, and the second area 7c is provided on the display screen 7a of an image display device 7 separate from the image display device 6.
Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the sub-display screen 64 is used. For example, the sub-display screens 64L and 64R may each be provided with a first area, and the display screen 7a may be provided with a second area.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A9-1]
A gaming machine,
a first area and a second area different from the first area are provided on the display screen;
A first mode of a pattern variation display in which a pattern is varied on a predetermined trajectory spanning the first area and the second area;
A second mode of pattern variation display in which a specific image is displayed in the first area to vary the pattern only on a trajectory included in the second area of the predetermined trajectory is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A9-1,
The pattern change display of the first aspect and the pattern change display of the second aspect are executed for a pattern in a predetermined row among the patterns variably displayed in a plurality of rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A9-1 or A9-2,
The first area is provided on a display screen of a first display device, and the second area is provided on a display screen of a second display device separate from the first display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A9-1 to A9-3,
In both the first and second modes of the pattern changing display, a stop position where the pattern is stopped and displayed is provided on the track included in the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A9-1 to A9-4,
When the expectation of transition to a winning game is high, the pattern change display of the second mode is likely to be executed instead of the pattern change display of the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A9-1 to A9-5,
The specific image is an image suggesting the expectation of transition to a winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are provided with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these, and the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display performance of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display performance may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, and the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: gaming machine 3: playing area 5: board lamp 7: image display device 9A, 9B: reserved image (reserved icon)
9C…Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 17 ... Big prize opening start hole 20 ... First start hole (first ball entry hole)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64: Sub-display screen 69: Movable frame accessory 66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Performance control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Before the multiple decorative symbols are displayed in a winning state, a specific image is displayed, which suggests that a specific game state will occur after a winning game state that is executed after the display of the winning decorative symbols is displayed.
The specific image is an image that is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a variable display in which the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a winning state in which the specific game state occurs, and is an image that disappears after the state changes before the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed,
When the state of the specific image is changing, there is a timing when the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a winning state in which the specific game state does not occur, and after the specific image disappears, the plurality of decorative symbols are definitively displayed in a winning state in which the specific game state occurs.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images